K61010om PDF

2010 Fit
Owners Manual
(Unlinked)
This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web use. This is due to changes
in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a
hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.
2009 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. P/N 00X31-TK6-6100

Owner's Identification
OWNER _________________________________________________________ This owner's manual should be considered a

permanent part of the vehicle and should
______________________________________________________________________________ remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
ADDRESS _______________________________________________________ This owner's manual covers all models of the

Fit. You may find descriptions of equipment
STREET and features that are not on your particular
vehicle.
_________________________________ _________________________________ ___________________
The information and specifications included
CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/
in this publication were in effect at the time of
POSTAL CODE approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
V. I. N. ___________________________________________________________ reserves the right, however, to discontinue or
change specifications or design at any time
DELIVERY DATE __________________________________________________ without notice and without incurring any
obligation whatsoever.
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME ___________________ DEALER NO. ___________________
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN AVIS
ADDRESS _______________________________________________________ IMPORTANT: Si vous avez besoin
STREET d'un Manuel du Conducteur en
franais, veuillez demander votre
concessionnaire de commander le
_________________________________ _________________________________ ___________________ numro de pice 33TK6C10
CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
OWNER'S SIGNATURE ___________________________________________
DEALER'S SIGNATURE ___________________________________________
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2010 Honda Fit was a wise investment. It As you read this manual, you will find
will give you years of driving pleasure. information that is preceded by a
symbol. This information is
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to read
intended to help you avoid damage to
this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
your vehicle, other property, or the
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner's manual in your vehicle so
environment.
you can refer to it at any time.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the
instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer's staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique
to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
i
Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning

WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure of
any airbag system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It
may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
ii
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:
is very important. And operating this Safety Labels on the vehicle.
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility. Safety Messages preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have These signal words mean:
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
this manual. This information alerts HURT if you don't follow instructions.
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others. You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
Of course, it is not practical or HURT if you don't follow instructions.
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
maintaining your vehicle. You must instructions.
use your own good judgement.
Safety Headings such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
iii
Contents
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) .................................................................................................................... 3
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) ........................................................................... 5
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, dashboard, steering wheel, and other convenience items) .............. 57
Features (heating and cooling, audio, steering wheel, security, and cruise control) ................................................ 109
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ....................................................................................... 197
Driving (engine and transmission operation) ........................................................................................................... 213
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage) ........................................................... 243
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, jump starting, overheating, and fuses) ................................................... 283
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls) ........................................................ 315
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) ........................ 331
INDEX
Index .............................................................................................................................................................................. I
Service Information Summary (fluid capacities and tire pressures) ............................................................... last page
1
Overview of Contents
Contents Before Driving Warranty and Customer Relations

A convenient reference to the What gasoline to use, how to break- (U.S. and Canada only)
sections in this manual. in your new vehicle, and how to load A summary of the warranties
Your Vehicle at a Glance luggage and other cargo. covering your new vehicle, and how
A quick reference to the main Driving to contact us for any reason. Refer to
controls in your vehicle. The proper way to start the engine, your warranty manual for detailed
shift the transmission, and park. information.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important information about the Maintenance Index
proper use and care of your vehicle's The maintenance minder shows you Service Information Summary
seat belts, an overview of the when you need to take your vehicle A summary of the information you
supplemental restraint system, and to the dealer for maintenance need when you pull up to the fuel
valuable information on how to service. There is also a list of things pump.
protect children with child restraints. to check and instructions on how to
Instruments and Controls check them.
Explains the purpose of each Taking Care of the Unexpected
instrument panel indicator and This section covers several problems
gauge, and how to use the controls motorists sometimes experience, and
on the dashboard and steering details how to handle them.
column.
Technical Information
Features ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
How to operate the heating and air and technical information.
conditioning system, the audio
system, and other convenience
features.
2
Your Vehicle at a Glance
DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG INSTRUMENT PANEL AUDIO SYSTEM

(P. 9, 25) INDICATOR (P. 60) (P. 115, 143)
GAUGES (P. 68) NAVIGATION SYSTEM
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P. 101) PASSENGER'S FRONT
AIRBAG
(P. 9, 25)
DOOR LOCK TAB
(P. 81)
USB ADAPTER CABLE
POWER DOOR LOCK (P. 130, 137, 171, 178)
MASTER SWITCH
(P. 81)
HEATING/COOLING
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
SWITCHES (P. 110)
(P. 100)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P. 200)
PARKING BRAKE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (P. 219)

(P. 102) MANUAL TRANSMISSION (P. 217)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
: If equipped
CONTINUED
3
PADDLE SHIFTER HORN1 INSTRUMENT PANEL PADDLE SHIFTER WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

(DOWNSHIFT)2 BRIGHTNESS (P. 76) (UPSHIFT)2 (P. 73)
(P. 224) (P. 224)
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNAL/ HAZARD WARNING
FOG LIGHTS2 BUTTON
(P. 74) (P. 76)
REMOTE AUDIO PASSENGER
CONTROL AIRBAG OFF
BUTTONS2 INDICATOR
(P. 189) (P. 31)
NAVIGATION REAR WINDOW
SYSTEM VOICE DEFOGGER/
CONTROL HEATED MIRROR
BUTTONS3 BUTTON2
(P. 76/102)
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
VEHICLE STABILITY (P. 190)
ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM OFF ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
SWITCH2 (P. 106)
(P. 234)
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS2
(P. 77) (P. 194)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
1: To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
2: If equipped.
3: Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
4
This section gives you important Lap/Shoulder Belt ...................... 19 If You Must Drive with Several
information about how to protect Automatic Seat Belt Children ................................ 37
yourself and your passengers. It shows Tensioners ............................. 20 If a Child Requires Close
you how to use seat belts. It explains Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 20 Attention ................................ 37

how your airbags work. And it tells you Additional Information About Your Additional Safety Precautions ...... 38
how to properly restrain infants and Airbags .................................. 22 Protecting Infants and Small
children in your vehicle. Airbag System Components ........ 22 Children ................................. 39
How Your Front Airbags Work .... 25 Protecting Infants ....................... 39
Important Safety Precautions............. 6 How Your Side Airbags Work ...... 28 Protecting Small Children ........... 40
Your Vehicle's Safety Features .......... 7 How Your Side Curtain Airbags Selecting a Child Seat ..................... 41
Seat Belts ..................................... 8 Work ..................................... 30 Installing a Child Seat ..................... 42
Airbags ........................................ 9 How the SRS Indicator Works ..... 30 Installing a Child Seat with
Protecting Adults and Teens ........... 11 How the Side Airbag Off LATCH .................................. 43
1. Close and Lock the Doors........ 11 Indicator Works ..................... 31 Installing a Child Seat with a
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............. 11 How the Passenger Airbag Off Lap/Shoulder Belt .................. 45
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs .............. 12 Indicator Works ..................... 31 Installing a Child Seat with a
4. Adjust the Head Restraints ...... 13 Airbag Service ............................ 32 Tether ................................... 47
5. Fasten and Position the Seat Additional Safety Precautions ...... 33 Protecting Larger Children ............. 49
Belts .................................. 14 Protecting Children General Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 49
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Guidelines .............................. 34 Using a Booster Seat................... 50
Position .............................. 15 All Children Must Be When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Advice for Pregnant Women........ 16 Restrained.............................. 34 Front ..................................... 51
Additional Safety Precautions ...... 17 All Children Should Sit in a Back Additional Safety Precautions ...... 52
Additional Information About Your Seat ....................................... 35 Carbon Monoxide Hazard ............... 53
Seat Belts ............................... 18 The Passenger's Front Airbag Safety Labels .................................. 54
Seat Belt System Components ..... 18 Can Pose Serious Risks........... 35
5
Important Safety Precautions
You'll find many safety Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed
recommendations throughout this While airbags can save lives, they can Excessive speed is a major factor in
section, and throughout this manual. cause serious or fatal injuries to crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the
The recommendations on this page are occupants who sit too close to them, or higher the speed, the greater the risk,
the ones we consider to be the most are not properly restrained. Infants, but serious injuries can also occur at
important. young children, and short adults are at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is
the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all safe for current conditions, regardless of
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
instructions and warnings in this the maximum speed posted.
A seat belt is your best protection in all
manual.
types of collisions. Airbags are designed Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition
to supplement seat belts, not replace Don't Drink and Drive Having a tire blowout or a mechanical
them. So even though your vehicle is Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one failure can be extremely hazardous. To
equipped with airbags, make sure you drink can reduce your ability to respond reduce the possibility of such problems,
and your passengers always wear your to changing conditions, and your check your tire pressures and condition
seat belts, and wear them properly (see reaction time gets worse with every frequently, and perform all regularly
page 14). additional drink. So don't drink and scheduled maintenance (see page 245).
drive, and don't let your friends drink
Restrain All Children
and drive, either.
Children age 12 and under should ride
properly restrained in a back seat, not Pay Appropriate Attention to the
the front seat. Infants and small children Task of Driving Safely
should be restrained in a child seat. Engaging in mobile phone conversation
Larger children should use a booster or other activities that keep you from
seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they paying close attention to the road, other
can use the belt properly without a vehicles and pedestrians could lead to
booster seat (see pages 34 52). crash. Remenber, situations can change
quickly, and only you can decide when it
is safe to divert attention away from
driving.
6
Your Vehicle's Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many

(3) (4) (9) features that work together to protect
you and your passengers during a
(1) crash.

(11)
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
(7) safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
(5) and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
However, you and your passengers
(2) can't take full advantage of these
(6) features unless you remain sitting in
(10) the correct position and always wear
(8) (1) Safety Cage
your seat belts. In fact, some safety
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs features can contribute to injuries if
(4) Head Restraints they are not used properly.
(2) (5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts The following pages explain how you
(7) Front Airbags can take an active role in protecting
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags yourself and your passengers.
(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(11) Door Locks
7
Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Your vehicle is equipped with seat against the inside of the vehicle
belts in all seating positions. Not wearing a seat belt properly and against other occupants.
increases the chance of serious
Your seat belt system also includes injury or death in a crash, even Keep you from being thrown out of
an indicator on the instrument panel though your vehicle has the vehicle.
and a beeper to remind you and your airbags. Help keep you in a good position
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
should the airbags ever deploy. A
Why Wear Seat Belts Be sure you and your good position reduces the risk of
Seat belts are the single most passengers always wear seat injury from an inflating airbag and
effective safety device for adults and belts and wear them properly. allows you to get the best
larger children. (Infants and smaller advantage from the airbag.
children must be properly restrained When properly worn, seat belts:
in child seats.) Of course, seat belts cannot
Keep you connected to the vehicle completely protect you in every
Not wearing a seat belt properly so you can take advantage of the crash. But in most cases, seat belts
increases the chance of serious vehicle's built-in safety features. can reduce your risk of serious
injury or death in a crash, even injury.
though your vehicle has airbags. Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including: What You Should Do:
In addition, most states and all frontal impacts Always wear your seat belt, and
Canadian provinces and territories side impacts make sure you wear it properly.
require you to wear seat belts. rear impacts
rollovers
8
Airbags

Your vehicle also has side airbags to In addition, your vehicle has side
help protect the upper torso of the curtain airbags to help protect the
Your vehicle has a supplemental
driver or a front seat passenger heads of the driver, front passenger,
restraint system (SRS) with front
during a moderate to severe side and passengers in the outer rear
airbags to help protect the heads and
impact (see page 28 for more seating positions during a moderate
chests of the driver and a front seat
information on how your side airbags to severe side or front impact (see
passenger during a moderate to
work). page 30 for more information on how
severe frontal collision (see page 25
your side curtain airbags work).
for more information on how your
front airbags work).
CONTINUED
9
The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear The rest of this section gives more
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit detailed information about how you
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
upright and as far back from the can maximize your safety.
They are designed to supplement steering wheel as possible while
Remember, however, that no safety
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
the seat belts. system can prevent all injuries or
front passenger should move their
deaths that can occur in a severe
Airbags offer no protection in rear seat as far back from the dashboard
impacts, or minor frontal or side crash, even when seat belts are
as possible.
collisions. properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
10
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction Your vehicle has a door and 2. Adjust the Front Seats
The following pages provide tailgate open indicator on
instructions on how to properly the instrument panel to indicate
protect the driver, adult passengers, when any door or the tailgate is not

and teenage children who are large tightly closed.
enough and mature enough to drive
Locking the doors reduces the
or ride in the front.
chance of someone being thrown out
See pages 34 38 for important of the vehicle during a crash, and it
guidelines on how to properly protect helps prevent passengers from
infants, small children, and larger accidentally opening a door and
children who ride in your vehicle. falling out.
1. Close and Lock the Doors Locking the doors and the tailgate
After everyone has entered the also helps prevent an outsider from
vehicle, be sure the doors and the unexpectedly opening a door or the Adjust the driver's seat as far to the
tailgate are closed and locked. tailgate when you come to a stop. rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
See page 81 for how to lock the Have a front passenger adjust their
doors, and page 62 for how the door seat as far to the rear as possible.
and tailgate open indicator works.
Some models have the auto door
locking/unlocking feature. For more
information, see page 83.
CONTINUED
11
If you sit too close to the steering 3. Adjust the Seat-Backs

wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front Sitting too close to a front
airbag, or by striking the steering airbag can result in serious
wheel or dashboard. injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Always sit as far back from the
Canada recommend that drivers front airbags as possible.
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the rock it back and forth to make sure it
steering wheel up and down, and in is locked in position.
and out (see page 77). See page 93 for how to adjust the Adjust the driver's seat-back to a
If you cannot get far enough away front seats. comfortable, upright position, leaving
from the steering wheel and still ample space between your chest and
reach the controls, we recommend the airbag cover in the center of the
that you investigate whether some steering wheel.
type of adaptive equipment may help. Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
12
4. Adjust the Head Restraints When a passenger is seated in the

rear center seating position, make
Reclining the seat-back too far sure the center head restraint is
can result in serious injury or properly positioned.

death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an

upright position, and sit well Improperly positioning head
back in the seat. restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
Reclining a seat-back so that the seriously injured in a crash.
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant's chest Make sure head restraints are
reduces the protective capability of in place and positioned properly
Adjust the driver's head restraint so
the belt. It also increases the chance before driving.
the center of the back of your head
of sliding under the belt in a crash rests against the center of the
and being seriously injured. The restraint. Properly adjusted head restraints will
farther a seat-back is reclined, the help protect occupants from whiplash
greater the risk of injury. Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller and other crash injuries.
See page 93 for how to adjust the persons should adjust their restraint See page 94 for how to adjust the
seat-backs. as high as possible. head restraints and how the driver's
and front passenger's active head
restraints work.
13
5. Fasten and Position the Seat

Belts
Insert the latch plate into the buckle, Improperly positioning the seat
then tug on the belt to make sure the belts can cause serious injury
belt is securely latched. Check that or death in a crash.
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious Make sure all seat belts are
injuries in a crash. properly positioned before
driving.
The seat belt in the center position of
the back seat can be unlatched and
retracted to allow the back seat to be If the seat belt touches or crosses
folded up or down. This seat belt your neck, or if it crosses your arm
Position the lap part of the belt as low as instead of your shoulder, you need to
should be latched whenever the seat- possible across your hips, then pull up
back is in an upright position. See adjust the seat belt anchor height.
on the shoulder part of the belt so the
page 99 for how to unlatch and lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong
relatch the seat belt. pelvic bones take the force of a crash
and reduces the chance of internal
injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the
belt rests across the center of your
chest and over your shoulder.
This spreads the forces of a crash over
the strongest bones in your upper body.
14
Never place the shoulder portion of a 6. Maintain a Proper Sitting

lap/shoulder belt under your arm or Position
behind your back. This could cause After all occupants have adjusted
very serious injuries in a crash. their seats and head restraints, and

If a seat belt does not seem to work put on their seat belts, it is very
properly, it may not protect the important that they continue to sit
occupant in a crash. upright, well back in their seats, with
their feet on the floor, until the
No one should sit in a seat with an vehicle is safely parked and the
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat engine is off.
belt that is not working properly can
RELEASE BUTTONS result in serious injury or death. Sitting improperly can increase the
Have your dealer check the belt as chance of injury during a crash. For
The front seats have adjustable seat example, if an occupant slouches, lies
belt anchors. To adjust the height of soon as possible.
down, turns sideways, sits forward,
an anchor, squeeze the two release See page 18 for additional leans forward or sideways, or puts
buttons, and slide the anchor up or information about your seat belts and one or both feet up, the chance of
down as needed (it has four how to take care of them. injury during a crash is greatly
positions). increased.
CONTINUED
15
In addition, an occupant who is out of Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit
position in the front seat can be upright and adjust the seat as far
seriously or fatally injured in a crash back as possible while allowing full
by striking interior parts of the control of the vehicle. When riding
vehicle or being struck by an as a front passenger, adjust the seat
inflating front airbag. as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries to
both you and your unborn child that
can be caused by a crash or an
Sitting improperly or out of inflating front airbag.
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash. Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it's okay for you to
Always sit upright, well back in drive.
If you are pregnant, the best way to
the seat, with your feet on the
protect yourself and your unborn
floor.
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
16
Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on seat Do not attach or place objects on
Never let passengers ride in the belts. Devices intended to improve the front airbag covers. Objects on
cargo area or on top of a folded- occupant comfort or reposition the the covers marked SRS AIRBAG
down back seat. If they do, they shoulder part of a seat belt can could interfere with the proper

could be very seriously injured in a reduce the protective capability of operation of the airbags or be
crash. the belt and increase the chance of propelled inside the vehicle and
Never let passengers ride in the serious injury in a crash. hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
area in front of a folded-up rear Do not place hard or sharp objects Do not attach hard objects on or
seat or on top of a folded-down rear between yourself and a front near a door. If a side airbag or a
seat. If they do, they could be very airbag. Carrying hard or sharp side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
seriously injured in a crash. objects on your lap, or driving with holder or other hard object
Passengers should not stand up or a pipe or other sharp object in your attached on or near the door could
change seats while the vehicle is mouth, can result in injuries if your be propelled inside the vehicle and
moving. A passenger who is not front airbag inflates. hurt someone.
wearing a seat belt during a crash
Keep your hands and arms away Do not cover or replace front seat-
or emergency stop can be thrown from the airbag covers. If your back covers without consulting
against the inside of the vehicle, hands or arms are close to an your dealer. Improperly replacing
against other occupants, or out of airbag cover, they could be injured or covering front seat-back covers
the vehicle. if the airbag inflates. can prevent your side airbags from
Two people should never use the inflating during a side impact.
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
17
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components If a front passenger does not fasten If the indicator comes on or the
Your seat belt system includes lap/ their seat belt, the indicator will beeper sounds when the driver's seat
shoulder belts in all seating positions. come on about 6 seconds after the belt is latched and there is no front
The front seat belts are also equipped ignition switch is turned to the ON seat passenger and no items on the
with automatic seat belt tensioners. (II) position. front seat, something may be
This system uses the same sensors as interfering with the monitoring
If either the driver or a front
the front airbags to monitor whether system. Look for and remove:
passenger does not fasten their seat
the front seat belts are latched or belt while driving, the beeper will
Any items under the front
unlatched, and how much weight is on sound and the indicator will flash passenger's seat.
the front passenger's seat (see page
again at regular intervals.
27). Any object(s) hanging on the seat
The seat belt system includes When no one is sitting in the front or in the seat-back pocket.
an indicator on the instrument passenger's seat, or a child or small Any object(s) touching the rear of
panel and a beeper to remind you and adult is riding there, the indicator
the seat-back.
your passengers to fasten your seat should not come on and the beeper
belts. should not sound. If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position before your seat
belt is fastened, the beeper will sound
and the indicator will flash. If your seat
belt is not fastened before the beeper
stops, the indicator will stop flashing
but remain on.
18
Lap/Shoulder Belt All seat belts have an emergency

The lap/shoulder belt goes over your locking retractor. In normal driving,
shoulder, across your chest, and the retractor lets you move freely in
across your hips. your seat while it keeps some tension

on the belt. During a collision or
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
sudden stop, the retractor
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
automatically locks the belt to help
belt to make sure the buckle is
restrain your body.
latched (see page 14 for how to
properly position the belt). The seat belts in all positions except
the driver's have a lockable retractor DETACHABLE
To unlock the belt, press the red
that must be activated to secure a ANCHOR
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
child seat (see page 45).
the belt across your body so that it The lap/shoulder belt in the center
retracts completely. After exiting the If the shoulder part of the belt is seating position on the rear seat is
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the pulled all the way out, the lockable equipped with a detachable seat belt
way and will not get closed in the retractor will activate. The belt will that has two parts: a small latch plate
door. retract, but it will not allow the and an anchor buckle.
passenger to move freely.
The detachable seat belt should
To deactivate the lockable retractor, normally be latched whenever the
unlatch the buckle and let the seat seat-backs are in an upright position.
belt fully retract. To refasten the seat For more information about the
belt, pull it out only as far as needed. detachable seat belt, see page 99.
19
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The tensioners are designed to Seat Belt Maintenance
activate in any collision severe For safety, you should check the
enough to cause the front airbags to condition of your seat belts regularly.
deploy.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
If a side curtain airbag deploys frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
during a side impact, the tensioner that the latches work smoothly and
on that side of the vehicle will also the belts retract easily. If a belt does
deploy. not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
The tensioners can also be activated
267). Any belt that is not in good
during a collision in which the front
condition or working properly will
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
not provide good protection and
airbags would not be needed, but the
should be replaced as soon as
extra tension in the seat belt could be
For added protection, the front seat possible.
helpful.
belts are equipped with automatic Honda provides a limited warranty
seat belt tensioners. When activated, When the tensioners are activated,
on seat belts. See your Honda
the tensioners immediately tighten the seat belts will remain tight until Warranty Information booklet for
the belts to help hold the driver and a they are unbuckled.
details.
front passenger in position.
20
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

it must be replaced by your dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a Not checking or maintaining
crash may not provide the same level seat belts can result in serious

of protection in a subsequent crash. injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
The dealer should also inspect the needed.
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat Check your seat belts regularly
belt tensioners activate during a and have any problem
crash, they must be replaced. corrected as soon as possible.
21
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
(8) (9)
(10)
(2) (11)
(5)
(12)
(1)
(3)
(1) Driver's Front Airbag
(2) Passenger's Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners (6)
(5) Side Airbags (4)
(6) Driver's Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger's Weight Sensors
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator (7)
(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(11) Front Passenger's Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(12) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator (4) (5)
22
Your airbag system includes:

(13) Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver's

airbag is stored in the center of the
steering wheel; the front
passenger's airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG (see page 25).
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked SIDE
AIRBAG (see page 28).
(14) Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
(15) (15) and rear pillars are marked SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG (see page 30).
(14)
(13) Side Curtain Airbags
(14) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(15) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
CONTINUED
23
Automatic front seat belt Weight sensors that monitor the An indicator on the instrument
tensioners (see page 20). weight on the front passenger's panel that alerts you that the
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs passenger's side airbag has been
Sensors that can detect a moderate
(29 kg) or less (the weight of an turned off (see page 31).
to severe front impact or side
infant or small child), the
impact. An indicator on the dashboard that
passenger's front airbag will be
alerts you that the passenger's
Sensors that can detect whether a turned off (see page 27).
front airbag has been turned off
child is in the passenger's side A sophisticated electronic system (see page 31).
airbag path and signal the control
that continually monitors and
unit to turn the airbag off (see Emergency backup power in case
records information about the
page 29). your vehicle's electrical system is
sensors, the control unit, the
disconnected in a crash.
Sensors that can detect whether airbag activators, the seat belt
the driver's seat belt and the front tensioners, and driver and front
passenger's seat belt are latched or passenger seat belt use when the
unlatched (see page 18). ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
A driver's seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat An indicator on the instrument
from the front airbag. If the seat is panel that alerts you to a possible
too far forward, the airbag will problem with your airbags,
inflate with less force (see page sensors, or seat belt tensioners
27). (see page 30).
24
How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.

Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In After inflating, the front airbags
such cases, the seat belt will provide immediately deflate, so they won't
If you ever have a moderate to severe sufficient protection, and the interfere with the driver's visibility,
frontal collision, sensors will detect supplemental protection offered by or the ability to steer or operate other
the vehicle's rapid deceleration. the airbag would be minimal. controls.
If the rate of deceleration is high Only the driver's airbag can deploy if The total time for inflation and
enough, the control unit will inflate there is no passenger in the front deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
the driver's and front passenger's seat, or if the advanced airbag fast that most occupants are not
airbags, at the time and with the system has turned the passenger's aware that the airbags deployed until
force needed. airbag off (see page 27). they see them lying in their laps.
CONTINUED
25
After a crash, you may see what Dual-Stage Airbags Dual-Threshold Airbags
looks like smoke. This is actually Your front airbags are dual-stage Your front airbags are also dual-
powder from the airbag's surface. airbags. This means they have two threshold airbags. Airbags with this
Although the powder is not harmful, inflation stages that can be ignited feature have two deployment
people with respiratory problems sequentially or simultaneously, thresholds that depend on whether
may experience some temporary depending on crash severity. sensors detect the occupant is
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of wearing a seat belt or not.
In a more severe crash, both stages
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do will ignite simultaneously to provide If the occupant's belt is not latched,
so. the quickest and greatest protection. the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
In a less severe crash, one stage will
occupant would need extra
ignite first, then the second stage will
protection.
ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time If the occupant's belt is latched, the
with a little less force. airbag will deploy at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
26
Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-

caused injuries to short drivers and
children or small statued adults who
ride in front. DRIVER'S
SEAT
For both advanced airbags to work POSITION PASSENGER'S
properly: SENSOR SEAT WEIGHT
Occupants must sit upright and SENSORS
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or The driver's advanced front airbag The passenger's advanced front
under the seats, cover the sensors, system includes a seat position airbag system has weight sensors
or put any objects or metal items sensor under the seat. If the seat is under the seat. Although Honda does
under the front seats. too far forward, the airbag will inflate not encourage carrying an infant or
with less force, regardless of the small child in front, if the sensors
Failure to follow these instructions severity of the impact. detect the weight of an infant or
could damage the sensors or prevent small child (up to about 65 lbs or 29
them from working properly. If there is a problem with the sensor,
kg), the system will automatically
the SRS indicator will come on, and
turn the passenger's front airbag off.
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver's Be aware that objects placed on the
seating position. passenger's seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.
CONTINUED
27
When the passenger airbag gets Moving the front seat forcibly back How Your Side Airbags Work
turned off by the weight sensors, a against cargo on the seat or floor
passenger airbag off indicator in behind it.
the center of the dashboard comes Hanging heavy items on the front
on (see page 31).
passenger seat, or placing heavy
If the weight sensors detect there is items in the seat-back pocket.
no passenger in the front seat, the Moving the front seat or seat-back
airbag is automatically turned off.
forcibly back against the folded
However, the passenger airbag off
rear seat.
indicator in this situation will not
come on. Back seat passengers should not
wedge objects or intentionally
To ensure that the passenger's
force their feet under the front
advanced front airbag system will
passenger seat. If you ever have a moderate to severe
work properly, do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the If your vehicle has optional floor side impact, sensors will detect rapid
weight on the front passenger's seat. mats, make sure the mat behind the acceleration and signal the control
This includes: driver's seat is hooked to the floor unit to instantly inflate either the
mat anchor (see page 267). If it is driver's or the passenger's side
A rear passenger pushing or airbag.
pulling on the back of the front not, the mat may interfere with the
passenger's seat. proper operation of the sensors and
operation of the seat.
28
Only one airbag will deploy during a Side Airbag Cutoff System If the side airbag off indicator comes
side impact. If the impact is on the Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff on (see page 31), have the passenger
passenger's side, the passenger's system designed primarily to protect sit upright. Once the passenger is
side airbag will deploy even if there a child riding in the front passenger's out of the airbag's deployment path,

is no passenger. seat. the system will turn the airbag back
Although Honda does not encourage on, and the indicator will go out.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants children to ride in front, if the There will be some delay between
should wear their seat belts and sit position sensors detect a child has the moment the passenger moves
upright and well back in their seats. leaned into the side airbag's into or out of the airbag deployment
deployment path, the airbag will shut path and when the indicator comes
off. on or goes off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a A front seat passenger should not
short adult leans sideways, or a use a cushion or another object as a
larger adult slouches and leans backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
sideways into the airbag's system from working properly.
deployment path.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
29
How Your Side Curtain Airbags If the impact is on the passenger's How the SRS Indicator Works
Work side, the passenger's side curtain The SRS indicator alerts
airbag will inflate even if there are no you to a potential problem
occupants on that side of the vehicle. with your airbags or seat belt
One or both side curtain airbags may tensioners.
inflate in a moderate to severe frontal When you turn the ignition switch to
collision which causes the front the ON (II) position, this indicator
airbags to deploy. comes on briefly then goes off. This
To get the best protection from the tells you the system is working
side curtain airbags, occupants properly.
should wear their seat belts and sit If the indicator comes on at any other
upright and well back in their seats. time, or does not come on at all, you
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG should have the system checked by
In a moderate to severe side impact, your dealer. For example:
sensors will detect rapid acceleration If the SRS indicator does not come
and signal the control unit to on after you turn the ignition
instantly inflate the side curtain switch to the ON (II) position.
airbag and activate the seat belt If the indicator stays on after the
tensioner on the driver's or the
engine starts.
passenger's side of the vehicle.
If the indicator comes on or flashes
on and off while you drive.
30
If you see any of these indications, How the Side Airbag Off Indicator How the Passenger Airbag Off
the airbags and seat belt tensioners Works Indicator Works
may not work properly when you U.S. Canada
need them. U.S.

This indicator PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
alerts you that the
passenger's side airbag has been
Ignoring the SRS indicator can automatically shut off. It does not
result in serious injury or death mean there is a problem with your
if the airbag systems or side airbags.
tensioners do not work When you turn the ignition switch to
properly. the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on briefly and then go
Have your vehicle checked by a off (see page 61). If it doesn't come On vehicle with navigation system
dealer as soon as possible if on, stays on, or comes on while This indicator alerts you that the
the SRS indicator alerts you to driving without a passenger in the passenger's front airbag has been
a possible problem. front seat, have the system checked. shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger's seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
CONTINUED
31
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR If an adult or teenage passenger is Airbag Service

U.S. Canada riding in front, move the seat as far to Your airbag systems are virtually
the rear as possible, and have the maintenance free, and there are no
passenger sit upright and wear the parts you can safely service.
seat belt properly. However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
on the seat, or with an adult riding that has deployed must be
there, something may be interfering replaced along with the control
with the weight sensors. Look for unit and other related parts. Any
On vehicle without navigation system and remove: seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
Be aware that objects placed on the Any items under the front
front seat can cause the indicator to passenger's seat. Do not try to remove or replace
come on. any airbag by yourself. This must
Any object hanging on the seat or
be done by an authorized dealer or
If the weight sensors detect there is in the seat-back pocket.
a knowledgeable body shop.
no passenger in the front seat, the Any object(s), such as a folded-
airbag will be off. However, the The SRS indicator alerts you to a
down back seat, that are touching problem. Take your vehicle to an
passenger airbag off indicator will the rear of the seat-back.
not come on. authorized dealer as soon as
If no obstructions are found, have possible. If you ignore this
The passenger airbag off indicator your vehicle checked by a dealer as indication, your airbags may not
may come on and off repeatedly if the soon as possible. operate properly.
total weight on the seat is near the
airbag cutoff threshold.
32
If your vehicle has a moderate to Additional Safety Precautions Do not remove or modify a front
severe impact. Even if your airbags Do not attempt to deactivate your seat without consulting your
do not inflate, your dealer should airbags. Together, airbags and dealer. This could make the
inspect the driver's seat position seat belts provide the best driver's seat position sensor or the

sensor, the front passenger's protection. front passenger's weight sensors
weight sensors, the front seat belt ineffective. If it is necessary to
Do not tamper with airbag remove or modify a front seat to
tensioners, and all seat belts worn components or wiring for any
during a crash to make sure they reason. Tampering could cause
accommodate a person with
are operating properly. disabilities, first contact Honda
the airbags to deploy, possibly
Automobile Customer Service at
causing very serious injury.
(800) 999-1009.
Do not expose the front
passenger's seat-back to liquid. If
water or another liquid soaks into
a seat-back, it can prevent the side
airbag cutoff system from working
properly.
33
Protecting Children General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained

Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are unrestrained
they are either unrestrained or not or improperly restrained can be
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle seriously injured or killed in a
accidents are the number one cause crash.
of the death of children aged 12 and
under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in a child seat. A
deaths and injuries, every state, larger child should be properly
Canadian province and territory restrained with a seat belt and
requires that infants and children be use a booster seat if necessary.
Children depend on adults to protect properly restrained when they ride in
them. However, despite their best a vehicle.
intentions, many adults do not know Larger children must be restrained
how to properly protect child Infants and small children must be with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on a
passengers. restrained in an approved child seat booster seat until the seat belt fits
that is properly secured to the vehicle them properly (see pages 49 52).
If you have children, or ever need to (see pages 39 48).
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
34
All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passenger's Front Airbag Can Small Children
Seat Pose Serious Risks Placing a forward-facing child seat in
According to accident statistics, Front airbags have been designed to the front seat of a vehicle equipped
children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to with a passenger's front airbag can be

safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this, hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
back seat. the passenger's front airbag is quite far forward, or the child's head is
large, and it can inflate with enough thrown forward during a collision, an
The National Highway Traffic Safety inflating front airbag can strike the
force to cause very serious injuries.
Administration and Transport child with enough force to kill or
Canada recommend that all children Even though your vehicle has an very seriously injure a small child.
aged 12 and under be properly advanced front airbag system that
restrained in a back seat. Some automatically turns the passenger's Larger Children
states have laws restricting where front airbag off under certain Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
children may ride. circumstances (see page 31), please or killed by an inflating passenger's
follow these guidelines: front airbag. Whenever possible,
Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking Infants larger children should sit in the back
interior vehicle parts during a Never put a rear-facing child seat in seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
collision or hard braking. Also, the front seat of a vehicle equipped be properly restrained with a seat
children cannot be injured by an with a passenger's front airbag. If the belt (see page 49 for important
inflating front airbag when they ride airbag inflates, it can hit the back of information about protecting larger
in the back. the child seat with enough force to children).
kill or very seriously injure an infant.
CONTINUED
35
To remind you of the passenger's U.S. Models

front airbag hazards, and that DASHBOARD
SUN VISORS
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models
SUN VISORS
36
If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close If a child requires close physical
Children Attention attention or frequent visual contact,
Your vehicle has a back seat where Many parents say they prefer to put we strongly recommend that another
children can be properly restrained. an infant or a small child in the front adult ride with the child in a back

If you ever have to carry a group of passenger seat so they can watch the seat. The back seat is far safer for a
children, and a child must ride in child, or because the child requires child than the front.
front: attention.
Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat
seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a
enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision, and paying close
belt properly (see page 49). attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
driving, placing both of you at risk.
rear as possible (see page 93).
Have the child sit upright and well
back in the seat (see page 15).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
14).
37
Additional Safety Precautions Make sure any unused seat belt For example, infants and small
Never hold an infant or child on that a child can reach is buckled, children left in a vehicle on a hot
your lap. If you are not wearing a the lockable retractor is activated, day can die from heatstroke. A
seat belt in a crash, you could be and the belt is fully retracted and child left alone with the key in the
thrown forward and crush the locked. If a child wraps a loose ignition switch can accidentally set
child against the dashboard or a seat belt around their neck, they the vehicle in motion, possibly
seat-back. If you are wearing a seat can be seriously or fatally injured. injuring themselves or others.
belt, the child can be torn from (See pages 45 and 46 for how to
activate and deactivate the Lock all doors and the tailgate
your arms and be seriously hurt or when your vehicle is not in use.
killed. lockable retractor.)
Children who play in vehicles can
Never put a seat belt over yourself
Use the childproof door locks to accidentally get trapped inside.
and a child. During a crash, the prevent children from opening the Teach your children not to play in
belt could press deep into the child rear doors. This can prevent or around vehicles.
and cause serious or fatal injuries. children from accidentally falling
out (see page 82). Keep vehicle keys/remote
Never let two children use the transmitters out of the reach of
same seat belt. If they do, they
Do not leave children alone in a children. Even very young
could be very seriously injured in a vehicle. Leaving children without children learn how to unlock
crash. adult supervision is illegal in most vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
states, Canadian provinces and switch, and open the tailgate,
territories, and can be very which can lead to accidental injury
hazardous. or death.
38
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants Two types of seats may be used: a Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
seat designed exclusively for infants, A rear-facing child seat can be placed
or a convertible seat used in the rear- in any seating position in the back
facing, reclining mode. seat, but not in the front. Never put a

rear-facing child seat in the front seat.
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position. If placed If the passenger's front airbag
facing forward, an infant could be inflates, it can hit the back of the
very seriously injured during a child seat with enough force to kill or
frontal collision. seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as
Child Seat Type recommended, or from locking their
An infant must be properly restrained seat-back in the desired position.
in a rear-facing, reclining child seat
until the child reaches the seat It could also interfere with proper
maker's weight or height limit for the operation of the passenger's
seat, and the child is at least one year advanced front airbag system.
old.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby's head,
neck, and back.
CONTINUED
39
Protecting Infants and Small Children
In any of these situations, we Protecting Small Children Of the different seats available, we
strongly recommend that you install recommend those that have a five-
the child seat directly behind the point harness system as shown.
front passenger's seat, move the seat We also recommend that a small child
as far forward as needed, and leave it use the child seat until the child
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get reaches the weight or height limit for
a smaller rear-facing child seat. the seat.
Child Seat Placement
We strongly recommend placing a
Placing a rear-facing child seat forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a Placing a forward-facing child seat in
collision. the front seat of a vehicle equipped
Child Seat Type
with a passenger's airbag can be
Many states, Canadian provinces and
Always place a rear-facing child hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too far
territories allow a child one year of age
seat in the back seat, not the or order who also meets the minimum forward, or the child's head is thrown
front. size and weight requirements to forward during a collision, an inflating
airbag can strike the child with
transition from a rea-facing child seat
enough force to cause very serious or
to a forward facing seat. Know the
requirements where you are driving fatal injuries.
and follow the child seat instructions.
Many experts recommend use of a
rear-facing seat up to age two, if the
child's height and weight are
appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
40
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
Even with advanced front airbags that Selecting a Child Seat Whatever type of seat you choose, to
automatically turn the passenger's When buying a child seat, you need provide proper protection, a child
front airbag off (see page 31), a back to choose either a conventional child seat should meet three
seat is the safest place for a small seat, or one designed for use with requirements:

child. the Lower Anchors and Tethers for
1. The child seat should meet Federal
If it is necessary to put a forward- CHildren (LATCH) system. Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213
facing child seat in the front, move the Conventional child seats must be or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
vehicle seat as far to the rear as secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
possible, and be sure the child seat is whereas LATCH-compatible seats 213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
firmly secured to the vehicle and the are secured by attaching the seat to
child is properly strapped in the seat. 2. The child seat should be of the
hardware built into the two outer proper type and size to fit the child.
seating positions in the back seat. Rear-facing for infants, forward-
Since LATCH-compatible child seats facing for small children.
Placing a forward-facing child are easier to install and reduce the 3. The child seat should fit the vehicle
seat in the front seat can result in possibility of improper installation, seating position (or positions)
serious injury or death if the front we recommend selecting this style. where it will be used.
airbag inflates.
In seating positions and vehicles not Before purchasing a conventional
If you must place a forward- equipped with LATCH, a LATCH- child seat, or using a previously
facing child seat in front, move compatible child seat can be installed purchased one, we recommend that
the vehicle seat as far back as using a seat belt. you test the seat in the specific
possible, and properly restrain vehicle seating position or positions
the child. where the seat will be used.
41
Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat A child seat secured with a seat 3. Secure the child in the child seat.
and a good place to install the seat, belt should be installed as firmly Make sure the child is properly
there are three main steps in as possible. However, it does not strapped in the child seat
installing the seat: need to be rock solid. Some side- according to the child seat maker's
to-side movement can be expected instructions. A child who is not
1. Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle. All child seats must be and should not reduce the child properly secured in a child seat
secured to the vehicle with the lap seat's effectiveness. can be seriously injured in a crash.
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with If the child seat is not secure, try The following pages provide
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and installing it in a different seating guidelines on how to properly install
Tethers for CHildren) system. A position, or use a different style of a child seat. A forward-facing child
child whose seat is not properly child seat that can be firmly seat is used in all examples, but the
secured to the vehicle can be secured. instructions are the same for rear-
endangered in a crash. facing child seats.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
42
Installing a Child Seat with BUTTON

LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) at the outer rear seats.
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH. Rigid type
The location of each lower anchor is LOWER ANCHORS
indicated by a small button above the To install a LATCH-compatible child 3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
anchor point. seat: seat, then attach the seat to the
You can find lower anchors in the 1. Move the seat belt buckle or lower anchors according to the
slits in the seat-backs. tongue away from the lower child seat maker's instructions.
anchors. Some LATCH-compatible seats
2. Make sure there are no objects have a rigid-type connector as
near the anchors that could shown above.
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
CONTINUED
43
ANCHOR
Flexible type
TETHER STRAP HOOK
Other LATCH-compatible seats 5. Lift the head restraint (see page 6. Attach the tether strap hook to the
have a flexible-type connector as 94), then route the tether strap anchor, then tighten the strap as
shown above. through the legs of the head instructed by the child seat maker.
restraint and over the seat-back,
4. Whatever type you have, follow the If the tether strap is too long and
making sure the strap is not
child seat maker's instructions for cannot be tightened firmly, find a
twisted.
adjusting or tightening the fit. route where the strap can be
tightened securely.
7. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
44
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the

vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver's have a lockable retractor that
must be activated to secure a child
seat.
If you intend to install a child seat in 1. With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor,
the center seating position of the rear seating position, route the belt slowly pull the shoulder part of the
seat, make sure to push down the through the child seat according to belt all the way out until it stops,
head restraint to the lowest position, the seat maker's instructions, then then let the belt feed back into the
and make sure the detachable seat insert the latch plate into the retractor.
belt is securely latched (see page buckle and remove any slack from
99). 3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
the lap portion of the belt.
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
CONTINUED
45
To deactivate the lockable retractor

and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat
locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side-to-side to
the belt near the buckle, and pull verify that it is secure enough to
up to remove any slack from the stay upright during normal driving
lap part of the belt. Remember, if maneuvers. If the child seat is not
the lap part of the belt is not tight, secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
the child seat will not be secure. retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to put
weight on the child seat, or push
on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
46
Installing a Child Seat with a Using an Outer Anchor ANCHOR

Tether ANCHOR
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in

the back seat.
Each rear outside seating position
has an anchorage point on the seat-
back, and the center seating position
has an anchorage point in the ceiling
near the tailgate.
TETHER STRAP HOOK
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt 2. Attach the tether strap hook to the
installation, we recommend using a 1. After properly securing the child anchor, making sure the tether
tether whenever one is required or seat (see page 45), lift the head strap is not twisted.
available. restraint, then route the tether 3. Tighten the strap according to the
strap over the seat-back and seat maker's instructions.
through the head restraint legs.
CONTINUED
47
Using the Center Anchor

ANCHOR
ANCHOR
COVER
TETHER STRAP HOOK
3. Route the tether strap over the
1. Lower the head restraint to its head restraint, then attach the
lowest position. tether strap hook to the anchor,
making sure the tether strap is not
2. After properly securing the child twisted.
seat (see page 45), open the
anchor cover. 4. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker's instructions.
48
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the Checking Seat Belt Fit

recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the Allowing a child age 12 or under
child should sit in a back seat on a to sit in front can result in injury

booster seat and wear the lap/ or death if the passenger's front
shoulder belt. airbag inflates.
The following pages give instructions If a child must ride in front,
on how to check proper seat belt fit, move the vehicle seat as far
what kind of booster seat to use if back as possible, use a booster
one is needed, and important seat if needed, have the child
precautions for a child who must sit sit up properly and wear the
in front. seat belt properly.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
2. Do the child's knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
CONTINUED
49
3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat Some states, Canadian provinces and
between the child's neck and arm? territories also require children to
use a booster seat until they reach a
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or
possible, touching the child's
60 lbs). Be sure to check current
thighs?
laws in the states, provinces and
5. Will the child be able to stay territories where you intend to drive.
seated like this for the whole trip?
Booster seats can be high-back or
If you answer yes to all these low-back. Whichever style you select,
questions, the child is ready to wear make sure the booster seat meets
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If federal safety standards (see page
you answer no to any question, the 35) and that you follow the booster
child needs to ride on a booster seat. seat maker's instructions.
A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat until
the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
50
If a child who uses a booster seat When Can a Larger Child Sit in Of course, children vary widely. And
must ride in front, move the vehicle Front while age may be one indicator of
seat as far back as possible and be The National Highway Traffic Safety when a child can safely ride in front,
sure the child is wearing the seat belt Administration and Transport there are other important factors you

properly. Canada recommend that all children should consider.
age 12 and under be properly Physical Size
A child may continue using a booster
restrained in a back seat. Physically, a child must be large
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle's or If the passenger's front airbag enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
booster's seat-back. A child of this inflates in a moderate to severe properly fit (see pages 14 and 49). If
height should be tall enough to use frontal collision, the airbag can cause the seat belt does not fit properly,
the lap/shoulder belt without a serious injuries to a child who is with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat. unrestrained, improperly restrained, booster seat, the child should not sit
sitting too close to the airbag, or out in front.
of position. Maturity
A side airbag also poses risks. If any To safely ride in front, a child must
part of a larger child's body is in the be able to follow the rules, including
path of a deploying side airbag, the sitting properly, and wearing the seat
child could receive possibly serious belt properly throughout a ride.
injuries.
CONTINUED
51
If you decide that a child can safely Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on a
ride up front, be sure to: Do not let a child wear a seat belt seat belt. Devices intended to
across the neck. This could result improve a child's comfort or
Carefully read the owner's manual,
in serious neck injuries during a reposition the shoulder part of a
and make sure you understand all
crash. seat belt can make the belt less
seat belt instructions and all safety
effective and increase the chance
information. Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back of serious injury in a crash.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear- or under the arm. This could cause
most position. very serious injuries during a
Have the child sit up straight, back crash. It also increases the chance
against the seat, and feet on or that the child will slide under the
near the floor. belt in a crash and be injured.
Check that the child's seat belt is Two children should never use the
properly and securely positioned. same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
Supervise the child. Even mature crash.
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
52
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle's exhaust contains With the tailgate open, airflow can
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon pull exhaust gas into your vehicle's
monoxide should not enter the Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
vehicle in normal driving if you Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the

maintain your vehicle properly and unconsciousness and even kill tailgate open, open all the windows
follow the information on this page. you. and set the heating and cooling
system as shown below.
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to If you must sit in your parked vehicle
The vehicle is raised for an oil carbon monoxide. with the engine running, even in an
change. unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system as follows:
You notice a change in the sound High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas, 1. Select the fresh air mode.
of the exhaust.
such as a garage. Do not run the 2. Select the mode.
The vehicle was in a collision that engine with the garage door closed.
may have damaged the underside. Even with the door open, run the 3. Turn the fan on high speed.
engine only long enough to move the 4. Set the temperature control to a
vehicle out of the garage. comfortable setting.
53
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that could cause serious injury or death.
Read these labels carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner),
contact your dealer for a replacement.
SUN VISORS
U.S. models Canadian models
DASHBOARD
U.S. models only
54
Safety Labels
DOORJAMBS
RADIATOR CAP
U.S. models Canadian models

55
56
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about Control Locations .......................... 58 Keys and Locks ............................. 78
the controls and displays that Instrument Panel .......................... 59 Immobilizer System ...................... 79
contribute to the daily operation of Instrument Panel Indicators .......... 60 Ignition Switch .............................. 80
your vehicle. All the essential Gauges.......................................... 68 Door Locks ................................... 81
controls are within easy reach. Trip Meter ................................ 69 Power Door Locks .................... 81

Instant Fuel Economy ............... 70 Childproof Door Locks .............. 82
Average Fuel Economy ............. 70 Auto Door Locking/
Odometer.................................. 70 Unlocking ............................. 83
Fuel Gauge ............................... 70 Auto Door Locking ................... 83
Check Fuel Cap Indicator ......... 70 Auto Door Unlocking ................ 85
Maintenance Minder ................ 71 Tailgate ......................................... 88
Controls Near the Steering Remote Transmitter ...................... 90
Wheel ....................................... 72 Seats ............................................. 93
Windshield Wipers and Power Windows .......................... 100
Washers ................................ 73 Mirrors ....................................... 101
Windshield Wipers ................... 73 Parking Brake ............................. 102
Rear Window Wiper and Interior Convenience Items ......... 104
Washer ................................. 73 Lower Glove Box .................... 105
Turn Signal and Headlights .......... 74 Upper Glove Box..................... 105
Headlights .................................... 75 Beverage Holders ................... 106
Instrument Panel Brightness ........ 76 Seat Under Box ....................... 106
Hazard Warning Button ................ 76 Accessory Power Socket ......... 106
Rear Window Defogger ................. 76 Sun Visor ................................ 106
Steering Wheel Adjustments ......... 77 Interior Lights ............................. 107
57
Control Locations
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P. 60) AUDIO SYSTEM (P. 115, 143)
GAUGES (P. 68) NAVIGATION SYSTEM
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P. 101)
USB ADAPTER CABLE

(P. 130, 137, 171, 178)
DOOR LOCK TAB
(P. 81)
POWER DOOR
LOCK MASTER SWITCH
(P. 81) HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
(P. 110)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P. 100)
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

(P. 200) (P. 219)
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Vehicle with navigation system is shown. PARKING BRAKE (P. 102) (P. 217)
: If equipped
58
Instrument Panel
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS INDICATOR (P. 65) LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P. 64)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P. 65) CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P. 65)

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 66, 193)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P. 31, 61)
FOG LIGHT INDICATOR (P. 64)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) LOW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATOR (P. 64)

SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 67)
TPMS INDICATOR (P. 64)
LOW TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR (P. 63) DOOR AND TAILGATE OPEN
INDICATOR (P. 62)
HIGH TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR (P. 63)
SEAT BELT REMINDER
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 60)
INDICATOR (P. 60, 303)
WASHER LEVEL
INDICATOR (P. 65)
MALFUNCTION LOW FUEL INDICATOR
INDICATOR LAMP (P. 304) (P. 62)
LOW OIL PRESSURE PARKING BRAKE AND
INDICATOR (P. 60, 303) BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P. 60, 305)
VSA OFF INDICATOR (P. 67)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) INDICATOR (P. 62)
INDICATOR (P. 62)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR (P. 66) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 30, 61)
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P. 65) IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 66)
: If equipped
59
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many U.S. Canada Seat Belt Reminder
indicators that give you important Parking Brake Indicator
information about your vehicle. and Brake This indicator comes on when you
System Indicator turn the ignition switch to the ON
Malfunction Indicator (Red)
Lamp (II) position. It reminds you and your
This indicator has two functions: passengers to fasten your seat belts.
See page 304. A beeper also sounds if you have not
1. It comes on when you turn the fastened your seat belt.
Low Oil Pressure ignition switch to the ON (II)
Indicator position. It is a reminder to check If you turn the ignition switch to the
the parking brake. A beeper ON (II) position before fastening
The engine can be severely damaged your seat belts, the beeper sounds,
if this indicator flashes or stays on sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released. and the indicator flashes. If you do
when the engine is running. For not fasten your seat belts before the
more information, see page 303. Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the beeper stops, the indicator stops
Charging System brakes and tires. flashing but remains on.
Indicator 2. If it remains on after you have fully
If this indicator comes on when the released the parking brake while
engine is running, the battery is not the engine is running, or if it
being charged. For more comes on while driving, there
information, see page 303. could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page 305.
60
If your front passenger does not Supplemental Restraint U.S. Canada

fasten their seat belt, the indicator System Indicator Side Airbag Off
comes on about 6 seconds after the This indicator comes on briefly when Indicator
ignition switch is turned to the ON you turn the ignition switch to the
(II) position. This indicator comes on briefly when
ON (II) position. If it comes on at any you turn the ignition switch to the

If either of you do not fasten your other time, it indicates a potential ON (II) position. If it comes on at any
seat belt while driving, the beeper problem with your front airbags. This other time, it indicates that the
will sound and the indicator will flash indicator will also alert you to a passenger's side airbag has
again at regular intervals. For more potential problem with your side automatically shut off. For more
information, see page 18. airbags, passenger's side airbag information, see page 31.
cutoff system, side curtain airbags,
automatic seat belt tensioners,
driver's seat position sensor, or the
front passenger's weight sensors.
For more information, see page 30.
CONTINUED
61
Anti-lock Brake System Electric Power Steering Low Fuel Indicator

(ABS) Indicator (EPS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for This indicator normally comes on when This indicator comes on as a
a few seconds when you turn the you turn the ignition switch to the ON reminder that you must refuel soon.
ignition switch to the ON (II) (II) position and goes off after the
engine starts. If it comes on at any When the indicator comes on, there
position, and when the ignition is about 1.64 US gal (6.2 L) of fuel
switch is turned to the START (III) other time, there is a problem in the
electric power steering system. If this remaining in the tank before the
position. If it comes on at any other needle reaches E. There is a small
time, there is a problem with the happens, stop the vehicle in a safe
place and turn off the engine. Reset the reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
ABS. If this happens, have your when the needle does reach E.
system by restarting the engine. The
vehicle checked at a dealer. With this indicator will not turn off immediately.
indicator on, your vehicle still has If it does not go off after driving a short Door and Tailgate Open
normal braking ability but no anti- distance, or comes back on again while Indicator
lock function. For more information, driving, take the vehicle to your dealer
see page 231. This indicator comes on if any door
to have it checked. With the indicator or the tailgate is not closed tightly.
on, the EPS may be turned off, making
the vehicle harder to steer.
If you turn the steering wheel to the
full left or right position repeatedly
while stopping or driving at very low
speed, you may feel slightly harder
steering in order to prevent damage to
the steering box caused by
overheating.
62
High Temperature Low Temperature Turn Signal and

Indicator Indicator Hazard Warning
This indicator monitors the This indicator monitors the Indicators
temperature of the engine coolant. It temperature of the engine coolant. If The left or right turn signal indicator
normally comes on when you turn the there is no problem, this indicator blinks when you signal a lane change

ignition switch to the ON (II) position comes on when the engine is cold. If or turn. If an indicator does not blink
and goes off after a few seconds. In it comes on when the engine is warm or blinks rapidly, it usually means
normal driving conditions, this (normal operating temperature), one of the turn signal bulbs is burned
indicator should not blink or stay on. In have the vehicle inspected by your out (see page 264). Replace the bulb
severe driving conditions, such as very dealer as soon as possible. as soon as possible, since other
hot weather or a long period of uphill
drivers cannot see that you are
driving, this indicator may blink. This
means the engine coolant temperature signaling.
is high. If the indicator begins to blink When you press the hazard warning
while you are driving, be sure to slow button, both turn signal indicators
down to prevent overheating. If the and all turn signals on the outside of
indicator stays on, pull safely to the the vehicle flash.
side of the road and turn off the engine.
See page 301 for instructions and
precautions on checking the engine's
cooling system.
Do not drive the vehicle while the
indicator is on or the engine may be
damaged.
CONTINUED
63
Low Tire Pressure Tire Pressure Monitoring Lights On Indicator

Indicator System (TPMS) Indicator
U.S. models only U.S. models only This indicator reminds you that the
This indicator normally comes on for This indicator normally comes on for exterior lights are on. It comes on
a few seconds when you turn the a few seconds when you turn the when the light switch is in either the
ignition switch to the ON (II) ignition switch to the ON (II) or position. If you turn the
position. If it comes on while driving, position. ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
it indicates that one or more of your (I) or LOCK (0) position without
vehicle's tires are significantly low on If this indicator comes on and stays turning off the light switch, this
pressure. on at any other time, or if it does not indicator will stay on. A reminder
come on when you turn the ignition chime will also sound when you open
If this happens, pull to the side of the switch to the ON (II) position, there the driver's door.
road when it is safe, check which tire is a problem with the TPMS. With
has lost the pressure, and determine this indicator on, the low tire Fog Light Indicator
the cause. If it is because of a flat tire, pressure indicator will not come on
replace the flat tire with the compact when a tire loses pressure. Take the
On Sport model
spare (see page 284), and have the vehicle to your dealer to have the
system checked. This indicator comes on when you
flat tire repaired as soon as possible. turn on the fog lights. For more
If two or more tires are underinflated, information, see page 75.
call a professional towing service
(see page 311). For more
64
High Beam Indicator Cruise Main Indicator Washer Level Indicator
This indicator comes on with the On Sport model and Canadian LX model Canadian models only
high beam headlights. For more This indicator comes on when you This indicator comes on when the
information, see page 75. turn on the cruise control system by washer fluid level is low. Add washer

pressing the CRUISE button (see fluid when you see this indicator
This indicator comes on with
page 194). come on (see page 258).
reduced brightness when the
daytime running lights (DRL) are on Cruise Control Indicator
(see page 75).
Daytime Running Lights On Sport model and Canadian LX model
Indicator This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page 194
If this indicator comes on when the for information on operating the
ignition switch is turned to the ON cruise control.
(II) position and the parking brake is
released, it means there is a problem
in the circuit. Have your vehicle
checked by your dealer.
CONTINUED
65
Maintenance Minder Immobilizer System Security System Indicator

Indicator Indicator
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
This indicator comes on for a few This indicator comes on briefly when
seconds when you turn the ignition you turn the ignition switch to the
switch to the ON (II) position. It ON (II) position. It will go off if you
reminds you that it is time to take have inserted a properly coded
your vehicle in for scheduled ignition key. If it is not a properly
maintenance. The maintenance main coded key, the indicator will blink,
items and sub items will be displayed and the engine's fuel system will be
in the information display. See page disabled (see page 79).
245 for more information on the
maintenance minder.
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the On Sport model
required maintenance service. This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. See page 193
for more information on the security
system.
66
Vehicle Stability Assist VSA Off Indicator

(VSA) System Indicator
If equipped If equipped
This indicator normally comes on for It comes on as a reminder that you
a few seconds when you turn the have turned off the vehicle stability

ignition switch to the ON (II) assist (VSA) system.
position and when the ignition switch This indicator normally comes on for
is turned to the START (III) position. a few seconds when you turn the
It flashes when VSA is active (see ignition switch to the ON (II)
page 233). position and when the ignition switch
is turned to the START (III) position.
If it comes on and stays on at any See page 233 for more information
other time, or if it does not come on on the VSA system.
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA system. Take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked. Without VSA, your vehicle
still has normal driving ability, but
will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement. See page 233
for more information on the VSA
system.
67
Gauges
INFORMATION DISPLAY TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE
ODOMETER/TRIP METER/INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY/ SELECT/RESET KNOB

U.S. model is shown. AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY/CHECK FUEL CAP INDICATOR
68
Gauges
Trip Meter
INSTANT FUEL
ECONOMY This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
ODOMETER TRIP METER AVERAGE FUEL ENGINE OIL LIFE driven since you last reset it.
ECONOMY
To reset a trip meter, display it, and

then press and hold the select/reset
knob until the number resets to
0.0.
When you reset the trip meter,
average fuel mileage is reset
simultaneously.
The information display consists of To switch the display, press and

two segments. The upper segment release the select/reset knob
displays instant fuel economy, repeatedly. When you turn the
maintenance item code(s), and the ignition switch to the ON (II)
lower segment displays the trip position the last selection is
meter, odometer, average fuel displayed.
economy, and engine oil life.
69
Gauges
Instant Fuel Economy Odometer Check Fuel Cap Indicator

This shows your instant fuel The odometer shows the total If the fuel fill cap is loose or missing,
economy in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km distance your vehicle has been a CHECK FUEL CAP message
(Canada). driven. It measures miles in U.S. appears on the information display
models and kilometers in Canadian after you start the engine. The
Average Fuel Economy
models. It is illegal under U.S. message changes from CHECK, to
This shows your vehicle's average
federal law and Canadian provincial/ FUEL, to CAP repeatedly.
fuel economy in mpg (U.S.) or 1/100
territorial regulations to disconnect,
km (Canada) since you last reset the Turn the engine off and confirm the
reset, or alter the odometer with the
trip meter. fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
intent to change the number of miles
the cap, then retighten it until it
When you reset a trip meter, the or kilometers indicated.
clicks at least once. You can cycle the
average fuel economiy for that trip
Fuel Gauge message off of the display by
meter also resets.
This shows how much fuel you have. pressing the select/reset knob
It may show slightly more or less repeatedly, but this message will be
than the actual amount. The needle displayed each time the engine is
returns to the bottom after you turn started. It will take several days of
off the ignition. normal driving for the vehicle to turn
the warning off.
Avoid driving with an extremely low

fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
70
Gauges
If the system still detects a loose or Maintenance Minder

missing fuel fill cap, the malfunction The information display in the
indicator lamp (MIL) comes on. Turn instrument panel shows you the
the engine off, and check or engine oil life and maintenance
retighten the fuel fill cap until it service items when the ignition
clicks at least once. The MIL goes switch is in the ON (II) position. This

out after several days of normal information helps to keep you aware
driving once the cap is tightened or of the periodic maintenance your
replaced. If it does not go out, have vehicle needs for continued trouble-
your dealer inspect the vehicle. For free driving. Refer to page 245 for
more information, see page 304. more information.
71
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
PADDLE SHIFTER (DOWNSHIFT)2 HORN1 INSTRUMENT PANEL PADDLE SHIFTER WINDSHIELD

(P. 224) BRIGHTNESS (UPSHIFT)2 WIPERS/WASHERS
(P. 76) (P. 224) (P. 73)
HEADLIGHTS/ HAZARD WARNING

TURN SIGNAL/ BUTTON
FOG LIGHTS2 (P. 76)
(P. 74) PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
REMOTE AUDIO (P. 31)
CONTROL BUTTONS2
(P. 189) REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER/HEATED
MIRROR BUTTON2
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (P. 76/102)
VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS3
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
(P. 190)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
OFF SWITCH2
(P. 234) STEERING WHEEL CRUISE CONTROL ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
ADJUSTMENTS BUTTONS2 (P. 106)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown. (P. 77) (P. 194)
1: To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
2: If equipped.
3: Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
72
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers MIST The wipers run at high Rear Window Wiper and Washer
speed until you release the lever.
OFF The wipers are not activated.
INT The wipers operate every few
seconds.

LO The wipers run at low speed.
HI The wipers run at high speed.
Windshield Washers Pull the
wiper control lever toward you, and
hold it. The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run at
1. MIST low speed, then complete one more 1. OFF
2. OFF sweep after you release the lever. When you turn the wiper switch to
3. INT Intermittent the OFF position, the wiper will
4. LO Low speed return to its parked position.
5. HI High speed
2. Rotate the switch clockwise to turn
6. Windshield washers
the rear window wiper ON.
Push the right lever up or down to
3. Hold past ON to turn the rear
select a position.
window wiper on and to spray the
rear window washer.
CONTINUED
73
Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal and Headlights
4. Hold past OFF to turn the rear Turn Signal and Headlights Turn Signal Push down on the
window wiper on and to spray the left lever to signal a left turn and up
rear window washer. The rear to signal a right turn. To signal a lane
window wiper makes one more change, push lightly on the lever and
sweep after you release the switch. hold it. The lever will return to the
center when you release it or
When you shift the transmission to
complete a turn.
the reverse position with the front
windshield wiper activated, the rear
wiper operates automatically even if
the rear wiper switch is off.
The rear window washer uses the
same fluid reservoir as the
windshield washer.
1. Turn signal
2. Off
3. Parking and interior lights
4. Headlights
5. High beams
6. Flash high beams
On Sport model
7. Fog lights off
8. Fog lights on
74
Headlights
Headlights Turning the switch to High Beams Push the lever Daytime Running Lights
the position turns on the forward and the high beam indicator With the headlight switch off or in
parking lights, taillights, instrument will come on (see page 65). Pull it the position, the high beam
panel lights, side-marker lights, and back to return to low beams. headlights and the high beam
rear license plate lights. indicator come on with reduced
To flash the high beams, pull the
brightness when you turn the

Turning the switch to the lever back lightly, then release it.
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position turns on the headlights. The high beams will stay on as long
position and release the parking
as you hold the lever back.
When the light switch is in the brake. They remain on until you turn
or position, the lights Fog Lights the ignition switch off, even if you set
on indicator comes on as a reminder. On Sport model the parking brake.
This indicator stays on if you leave Turn the fog lights on and off by
The headlights revert to normal
the light switch on and turn the turning the switch next to the
operation when you turn them on
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY headlight switch.
with the switch.
(I) or the LOCK (0) position.
You can use the fog lights only when
If you leave the lights on with the key the headlights are on low beam.
removed from the ignition switch, They will go off when the headlights
you will hear a reminder chime when are turned off.
you open the driver's door.
75
Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger
Instrument Panel Brightness Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL KNOB
You can change the instrument panel Push the button to turn on the The rear window defogger will clear
brightness only when the ignition hazard warning lights (four-way fog, frost, and thin ice from the
switch is in the ON (II) position and flashers). This causes all four outside window. Push the defogger button to
the light switch is on. turn signals and both turn indicators turn it on and off. The indicator in the
Turn the knob on the lower part of the in the instrument panel to flash. Use button comes on to show the
instrument panel to adjust the the hazard warning lights if you need defogger is on. You must manually
brightness. to park in a dangerous area near shut off the rear window defogger
heavy traffic, or if your vehicle is when it is no longer needed.
You will hear a beep when maximum disabled.
or minimum brightness is reached.
You will also hear a beep when the
maximum level is canceled by turning
the knob a click to the left.
76
Rear Window Defogger, Steering Wheel Adjustments
Make sure the rear window is clear Steering Wheel Adjustments

and you have good visibility before Make any steering wheel adjustment
starting to drive. before you start driving.
The defogger wires on the inside of
the rear window can be accidentally

damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side-to-side. Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
If equipped cause you to lose control of the
Pushing this button also turns the vehicle and be seriously injured
mirror heaters on or off. For more in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only 3. Push the lever forward fully to lock
when the vehicle is stopped. the steering wheel in position.
4. Make sure you have securely
1. Pull the lever under the steering locked the steering wheel in place
column toward you until it stops. by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down, and in or out, so it points
toward your chest, not toward your
face. Make sure you can see the
instrument panel gauges and
indicators.
77
Keys and Locks
On Sport model and Canadian LX model All models except Sport model and You should have received a key
Canadian LX model number tag with your keys. You will
KEY NUMBER TAG KEYS WITH need this key number if you ever
TRANSMITTER
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
KEY NUMBER TAG KEYS only Honda-approved key blanks.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the circuits
are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Your vehicle comes with the two
ignition keys. Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
All models except Sport model and
Canadian LX model
The keys do not contain batteries.
Do not try to take them apart.
78
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects If the system repeatedly does not As required by the FCC:
your vehicle from theft. If an recognize the coding of your key, This device complies with Part 15 of the
improperly coded key (or other contact your dealer. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
device) is used, the engine's fuel following two conditions: (1) This device
Do not attempt to alter this system or may not cause harmful interference, and
system is disabled.
add other devices to it. Electrical (2) this device must accept any

When you turn the ignition switch to problems could result that may make interference received, including
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer your vehicle inoperable. interference that may cause undesired
system indicator should come on operation.
If you have lost your key and cannot
briefly, then go off. If the indicator Changes or modifications not expressly
start the engine, contact your dealer.
starts to blink, it means the system approved by the party responsible for
does not recognize the coding of the compliance could void the user's
key. Turn the ignition switch to the authority to operate the equipment.
LOCK (0) position, remove the key,
Always take the ignition key with you This device complies with Industry
reinsert it, and turn the ignition Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is
switch to the ON (II) position again. whenever you leave the vehicle alone.
subject to the following two conditions:
The system may not recognize your (1) this device may not cause
key's coding if another immobilizer interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
key or other metal object (i.e. key undesired operation of the device.
chain) is near the ignition switch
when you insert the key.
79
Ignition Switch
ACCESSORY (I) You can operate

the audio system and the accessory
power socket in this position. Removing the key from the
ignition switch while driving
ON (II) This is the normal key locks the steering. This can
position when driving. Several of the cause you to lose control of the
indicators on the instrument panel vehicle.
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the Remove the key from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II) ignition switch only when
position. parked.
START (III) Use this position
The ignition switch has four positions: only to start the engine. The switch
LOCK (0), ACCESSORY (I), ON (II), returns to the ON (II) position when
and START (III). you let go of the key.
LOCK (0) You can insert or remove You will hear a reminder beeper if
the key only in this position. To turn you leave the key in the LOCK (0) or
the key, push it in slightly. If your the ACCESSORY (I) position and
vehicle has an automatic transmission, open the driver's door. Remove the
the shift lever must also be in Park. key to turn off the beeper.
If the front wheels are turned, the anti- If your vehicle has an automatic
theft lock may make it difficult to turn
the key. Firmly turn the steering wheel
transmission, the shift lever must be
to the left or right as you turn the key. in Park before you can remove the
key from the ignition switch.
80
Door Locks
LOCK TAB When the door is unlocked, you can Power Door Locks
To lock see the red indicator on the lock tab
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
above the inner door handle.

UNLOCK
To unlock
LOCK
RED INDICATOR
Each door has a lock tab next to the
inside door handle. Pull the lock tab
All models except Canadian DX and
to lock the door, and push it forward DX-A models
to unlock the door. To lock the doors and the tailgate,
All models except Sport model and
On Canadian DX and DX-A models Canadian LX model push the top of the master door lock
To lock the passenger's door when Each front door can be locked or switch on the driver's door, pull the
getting out of the vehicle, pull the unlocked with the ignition key. lock tab rearward on the driver's
lock tab and close the door. To lock door, or use the key in the outside
the driver's door, pull and hold the door lock on the driver's door.
outside door handle, then pull the Pushing the bottom of the master
lock tab. Release the handle, then door lock switch unlocks all doors
close the door. and the tailgate.
CONTINUED
81
Door Locks
The lock tab on each passenger's Lockout Prevention Childproof Door Locks
door locks and unlocks only that If you forget and leave the key in the
LEVER
door. Pushing forward the lock tab ignition switch, lockout prevention
on the driver's door unlocks only that will not allow you to lock the driver's Unlock
door. To unlock only the driver's door. With any door open and the
door from the outside, turn the key key in the ignition switch, locking
and release it. If you turn it again, the with master door lock switch is
remaining doors and the tailgate disabled. If the driver's door is Lock
unlock. closed, the lock tab on the driver's
door is not disabled. Pulling the
To lock a passenger's door when driver's lock tab rearward will lock all
getting out of the vehicle, pull the doors. If you try to lock an open
lock tab rearward and close the door. driver's door by pulling the lock tab
To lock the driver's door, remove rearward, the driver's door lock tab
key from ignition switch and pull the pops out and unlocks the driver's The childproof door locks are
lock tab rearward or push the top of door. designed to prevent children seated
the master door lock switch, then in the rear from accidentally opening
close the door. the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position (lever is
down), the door cannot be opened
from the inside regardless of the
position of the lock tab. To open the
door, pull the lock tab forward and
use the outside door handle.
82
Door Locks
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Auto Door Locking To turn off the Auto Door Lock
On all models except Canadian DX and The auto door locking feature has modes:
DX-A three possible settings:
Your vehicle has customizable
settings for the doors and tailgate to
The auto door locking is
automatically lock and unlock. There deactivated all the time.

are default settings for each of these
All doors and tailgate lock
features. You can turn off or change whenever you move the shift lever
the settings for these features as out of the Park (P) position (A/T
described on the following pages. vehicles).
When you customize the setting, All doors and tailgate lock when
make sure your vehicle is parked the vehicle speed reaches 9 mph
safely, the engine is off, and apply the (15 km/h).
parking brake. Make all settings This is the default setting.
before you start driving. 1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver's
door.
CONTINUED
83
Door Locks
3. Push and hold the front of the To program the Park Lock mode: 3. Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the Locks all doors and tailgate when the master door lock switch on the
driver's door until you hear a click shift lever is moved out of the Park (P) driver's door. You will hear a click.
(after about 5 seconds). position (A/T vehicles only). Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
4. Release the switch, and within 5
seconds).
seconds, turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position. 4. Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the

Park (P) position.
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver's door.
84
Door Locks
To program the Drive Lock mode: 3. On A/T vehicles, push and hold the Auto Door Unlocking
Locks all doors and tailgate when the brake pedal, and move the shift The auto door unlocking feature has
vehicle's speed reaches about 9 mph (15 lever out of the Park (P) position. five possible settings:
km/h).
4. Push and hold the front of the The auto door unlocking is
master door lock switch on the deactivated all the time.

driver's door. You will hear a click. On A/T vehicles, the driver's door
Keep holding the switch until you unlocks when you move the shift
hear another click (after about 5 lever to the Park (P) position with
seconds). the brake pedal depressed.
5. Release the switch, and within 5 This is the default setting.
seconds, turn the ignition switch to All doors and tailgate unlock when
the ACCESSORY (I) position. On you move the shift lever to the Park
A/T vehicles, move the shift lever to (P) position (A/T vehicles) with the
A/T models the Park (P) position. brake pedal depressed.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the The driver's door unlocks whenever
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the LOCK (0) position. you turn the ignition switch to the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles). ACCESSORY (I) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON This is the default setting on M/T
(II) position, and make sure to vehicles.
close the driver's door. All doors and tailgate unlock
whenever you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
CONTINUED
85
Door Locks
To turn off the Auto Door Unlock 4. Release the switch, and within 5 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
modes: seconds, turn the ignition switch to (II) position, and make sure to
the LOCK (0) position. close the driver's door.
To program the Park Unlock mode: 3. Push and hold the rear of the
Unlocks the driver's door or all doors master door lock switch on the
and tailgate when the shift lever is driver's door. You will hear a click.
moved into the Park (P) position with Continue to hold the switch:
the brake pedal depressed (A/T vehicles
only). Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate driver's door unlock
feature.
Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the to activate all doors and tailgate
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles). unlock feature.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON 4. Release the switch, and within 5
(II) position, and open the driver's seconds, turn the ignition switch to
door. the LOCK (0) position.
3. Push and hold the rear of the
master door lock switch on the 1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
driver's door. You will hear a click, Park (P) position.
and after about 5 seconds, you will
hear another click.
86
Door Locks
To program the Ignition Switch 3. On A/T vehicles, push and hold the Even if your vehicle's battery is
Unlock mode: brake pedal, then move the shift removed or goes dead, the system
Unlocks the driver's door or all doors lever out of the Park (P) position. keeps the auto door lock/unlock
and tailgate when the ignition switch is setting which you selected.
moved out of the ON (II) position. 4. Push and hold the rear of the
master door lock switch on the

driver's door. You will hear a click.
Continue to hold the switch:
Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate driver's door unlock
feature.
Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
A/T models to activate all doors and tailgate
unlock feature.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the 5. Release the switch, and within 5
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles). seconds, turn the ignition switch to
the ACCESSORY (I) position. On
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON A/T vehicles, move the shift lever to
(II) position, and make sure to the Park (P) position.
close the driver's door.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
87
Tailgate
All models except Canadian DX and

DX-A models
The tailgate will lock or unlock when
you lock or unlock the driver's door
by using the key, the lock tab on the
driver's door, the master door lock LOCK
switch or the remote transmitter (if
equipped). UNLOCK
HANDLE
KEY
All models except Sport model and To open the tailgate, pull the handle,
Canadian LX model then lift up.
You can lock or unlock the tailgate
with the key.
88
Tailgate
Unlocking the Tailgate
Lock Unlock

TAILGATE HANDLE
To close the tailgate, hold the tailgate Push the release lever to the right as
handle, lower the tailgate, then press shown.
On Sport model and Canadian LX model
down on the back edge.
If the power door lock system cannot If you need to unlock the tailgate
Keep the tailgate closed at all times unlock the tailgate, unlock it manually, it means there is a
while driving to avoid damaging the manually. problem with the tailgate. Have the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas vehicle checked by your dealer.
Place a cloth on the edge of the cover
from getting into the interior. See
to prevent scratches, then use a
Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
small flat-tip screwdriver to remove
53.
the cover on the back of the tailgate.
89
Remote Transmitter
UNLOCK Press this button once PANIC Press this button for
LED
LOCK
to unlock the driver's door. Push it about 2 seconds to attract attention:
BUTTON twice to unlock the remaining doors the horn will sound, and the exterior
UNLOCK and the tailgate. Some exterior lights lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
BUTTON will flash twice each time you press To cancel panic mode, press any
the button. other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch to the ON (II) position.
switch is in the door activated
PANIC position) will come on when you
BUTTON press the UNLOCK button. If you do
not open any door or the tailgate
within 30 seconds, the light fades
On Sport model and Canadian LX model out. If you relock the doors and the
LOCK Press this button once to tailgate with the remote transmitter
lock all doors and the tailgate. Some before 30 seconds have elapsed, the
exterior lights will flash once. When light will go off immediately.
you push LOCK twice within 5
seconds, the horn will sound to verify If you do not open any door or the
that the doors and the tailgate are tailgate within 30 seconds, they will
locked and the security system (if automatically relock and the security
equipped) has set. You cannot lock system (if equipped) will set.
the doors and the tailgate if any door
or the tailgate is not fully closed or
the key is in the ignition switch.
90
Remote Transmitter
Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Transmitter Battery

Avoid dropping or throwing the If it takes several pushes on the
transmitter. button to lock or unlock the doors
Protect the transmitter from and the tailgate, replace the battery
extreme temperature. as soon as possible.
Do not immerse the transmitter in Battery type: CR1616

any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer. SCREW
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
NOTE: Be careful not to strip the
head when removing this screw.
CONTINUED
91
Remote Transmitter
BATTERY 4. Remove the old battery, and insert As required by the FCC: This device
a new battery into the back of the complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
cover with the side facing down. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not
An improperly disposed of battery cause harmful interference, and (2) this
can hurt the environment. Always device must accept any interference
confirm local regulations for received, including interference that may
battery disposal. cause undesired operation.
5. Install the parts in reverse order. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
2. Separate the transmitter by prying This device complies with Industry
its middle seam with your Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is
fingernail. subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause
3. Inside the transmitter, separate the interference, and (2) this device must
inner cover from the keypad by accept any interference that may cause
carefully prying on the edge with a undesired operation of the device.
coin.
92
Seats
Front Seat Adjustments

See pages 11 12 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.

Make all seat adjustments before you
start driving.
To adjust the seat forward or To change the seat-back angle, pull

backward, pull up on the bar under up the lever on the outside of the
the seat cushion's front edge. Move seat bottom.
the seat to the desired position, and
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
release the bar. Try to move the seat
rock it back and forth to make sure it
to make sure it is locked in position.
is locked in position.
CONTINUED
93
Seats
Armrest Rear Seat Adjustments Head Restraints

See page 13 for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from the likelihood of
whiplash and other injuries.
RELEASE LEVER
On Sport model and Canadian LX model You can adjust the angle of the rear
The driver's seat has an armrest on seat-backs separately. To change the
the side of the seat-back. To use, seat-back angle, pull up the release
pivot it down. lever on the outer side of the seat-
back.
They are most effective when you

adjust them so the center of the back
of the occupant's head rests against
the center of the restraint.
94
Seats
Front Rear Center Removing the Head Restraint

CUSHION CUSHION
Position To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button,
then pull the restraint out of the seat-
back.

Failure to reinstall the head
LEGS RELEASE BUTTON LEGS RELEASE BUTTON restraints can result in severe
SEAT-BACK SEAT-BACK injury during a crash.
Adjusting the Head Restraint When a passenger is seated in the
The head restraints adjust for height. rear center seating position, the Always replace the head
You need both hands to adjust a center head restraint should be restraints before driving.
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it adjusted up or down, to match the
while driving. To raise it, pull passenger's height.
upward. To lower the restraint, push When reinstalling a head restraint,
the release button sideways, and put the legs back in place. Then
push the restraint down. adjust it to the appropriate height
while pressing the release button.
Make sure the head restraint locks in
position when you reinstall it.
CONTINUED
95
Seats
Active Head Restraints After a collision, the activated restraint For a head restraint system to work
should return to its normal position. properly:
If the restraints do not return to their Do not hang any items on the head
normal position, or in the event of a restraints, or from the restraint
severe collision, have the vehicle legs.
inspected by a Honda dealer.

Do not place any object between
an occupant and the seat-back.

Install each restraint in its proper
location.
Only use genuine Honda
replacement head restraints.
The driver's and front passenger's
seats have active head restraints. If the
vehicle is struck severely from the rear,
the occupant properly secured with the
seat belt will be pushed against the
seat-back and the head restraint will
automatically move forward.
This reduces the distance between the
restraint and the occupant's head. It
also helps protect the occupants
against the likelihood of whiplash and
injuries to the neck and upper spine.
96
Seats
Folding the Rear Seat Up Folding the Rear Seat Down

The left and right rear seat cushions LEG The rear seat-backs can be folded
can be lifted up separately to make down for more cargo room.
room for cargo.
Each side folds down separately, so
Remove any items from the seat you can still carry a passenger in the

before you fold up the seat cushion. rear outer seating position.

Remove any items from the seat
before folding down the seat-back.
FLOOR GUIDE
Make sure there are no items on the
LATCH

floor before folding down the seats.
To return the seat cushion to its
original position, first make sure
there are no items on the floor, then
pull up the seat leg fully, and push
down the seat cushion slowly while
holding it with your hands. Set the
seat leg in the floor guide. A latch
Pull up the rear seat cushion, and comes out when the leg is set
fold the seat leg down. Push the seat properly.
cushion firmly against the seat-back
to lock it.
CONTINUED
97
Seats
Do not put any heavy items on the

seat-back when it is folded down.
While lifting the seat-back, the seat
cushion may come up with it. To
secure the seat cushion, see page 97.
Make sure the seat-back and seat
cushion are locked securely and all
rear shoulder belts are positioned in
front of the rear seat-backs. In the
LATCH PLATE center seating position of the rear
RELEASE LEVER seat, be sure the detachable anchor
When you fold down the driver's side 1. Remove all items from the driver's is latched securely before using the
rear seat, use the latch plate to seat-back pocket. seat belt (see page 99).
release the center seat belt from the Make sure all items in the cargo area
2. Completely lower all rear head
detachable anchor (see page 99). are secured. Loose items can fly
restraints to prevent contact with,
Allow the seat belt to retract into the forward and cause injury if you have
or possible damage to the pocket.
holder on the ceiling, and store the to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo
buckles in it. 3. Pull up the release lever on the on page 208).
outside of the seat-back.
4. Fold the seat-back forward.
98
Seats
Detachable Anchor LATCH PLATE SMALL LATCH PLATE

The seat belt in the rear center seat
is equipped with a detachable
anchor.
This allows the center seat belt to be

ANCHOR
unlatched when the driver's side rear BUCKLE
seat is folded.
Using a seat belt with the SMALL LATCH PLATE TRIANGLE MARKS
detachable anchor unlatched
Pull out the small latch plate and the Line up the triangle marks on the
increases the chance of serious
latch plate from each holding slot in small latch plate and anchor buckle
injury or death in a crash.
the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt when reattaching the belt and
to extend it. buckle.
Before using the seat belt,
make sure the detachable Tug on the seat belt to verify that the
anchor is correctly latched. detachable anchor is securely
latched. Make sure the seat belt is
not twisted.
CONTINUED
99
Seats, Power Windows
ANCHOR Power Windows

BUCKLE
DRIVER'S WINDOW SWITCH Closing a power window on
someone's hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are

away from the windows before
closing them.
LATCH PLATE
When you push the MAIN switch in,
the switch is off, and the passenger
To unlatch the detachable anchor, MAIN SWITCH windows cannot be raised or
insert the latch plate into the slot on lowered. To cancel this feature, push
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
the side of the anchor buckle. Store on the switch again to get it to pop
(II) position to raise or lower any
the detachable anchor and seat belt out. Keep the MAIN switch off when
window. To open a window, push the
latch plates in the retractor housing. you have children in the vehicle so
switch down and hold it. Release the
switch when you want the window to they do not injure themselves by
stop. Pull back on the switch and operating the windows
hold it to close the window. unintentionally.
The windows will operate for up to 10
minutes after you turn off the ignition
switch. Opening either front door
cancels this function.
100
Power Windows, Mirrors
AUTO To open or close the Mirrors Adjusting the Power Mirrors

driver's window, push or pull the TAB SELECTOR SWITCH
window switch firmly down or up to
the second detent, and release it.
The window will automatically go
down or up all the way. To stop the

window, pull or push the window
switch briefly.
AUTO REVERSE If the driver's
window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction, and then stop. To
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch Keep the inside and outside mirrors 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
again. clean and adjusted for best visibility. (II) position.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
2. Move the selector switch to L
window is almost closed. You should you start driving.
(driver's side) or R (passenger's
always check that all passengers and The inside mirror has day and night side).
objects are away from the window positions. The night position reduces
before closing it. glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
CONTINUED
101
Mirrors, Parking Brake
3. Push the appropriate edge of the Heated Mirrors Parking Brake

adjustment switch to move the
mirror right, left, up, or down.
4. When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the adjustment
switch off to keep your settings.
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON PARKING BRAKE LEVER

On Canadian Sport and LX models To apply the parking brake, pull the
The outside mirrors are heated to lever up fully. To release it, pull up
remove fog and frost. With the slightly, push the button, and lower
ignition switch in the ON (II) the lever. The parking brake
position, turn on the heaters by indicator on the instrument panel
pressing the button. The indicator in should go out when the parking
the button comes on as a reminder. brake is fully released (see page 60).
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off. Pressing this button also
turns the rear window defogger on
and off.
102
Parking Brake
Driving the vehicle with the parking

brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound if
the vehicle is driven with the parking

brake on.
103
Interior Convenience Items
COAT HOOK VANITY MIRRORS

1
SUN VISOR
SEAT-BACK POCKET FRONT DOOR POCKET
REAR SIDE POCKET
(RIGHT SIDE) ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
UPPER GLOVE BOX
BEVERAGE
HOLDER
LOWER GLOVE BOX

CARGO FLOOR BOX2 SEAT UNDER BOX
BEVERAGE HOLDERS PASSENGER'S TRAY
1: If equipped
2: All Canadian models with automatic transmission CENTER POCKET
104
Lower Glove Box Upper Glove Box

An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat

belt.
Always keep the glove box

closed while driving.
Open the lower glove box by pulling Open the upper glove box by pulling
the bottom of the handle. Close it up on the lever. Close it with a firm
with a firm push. push.
105
Beverage Holders Seat Under Box Accessory Power Socket

This socket is intended to supply
KNOB power for 12 volt DC accessories that
are rated 120 watts or less (10 amps).
To use the accessory power socket,
pull up the cover. The ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position.
It will not power an automotive type
cigarette lighter element.
SEAT UNDER BOX MARKS

Sun Visor
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
Be careful when you are using the Pull up the driver's side rear seat When using the sun visor for the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid cushion (see page 97). side window, remove the support rod
that is very hot can scald you or your Open the seat under box by turning from the clip, and swing it out.
passengers. Liquid can also spill the knob. Make sure you put the sun visor
from the door pocket beverage To close the seat under box, turn the back in place when you are getting
holders when you open or close the knob and align the marks. into or out of the vehicle.
doors. Use only resealable containers
in the door pockets.
Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
106
Interior Lights
Ceiling Light After all doors are closed tightly, the

light fades out in about 30 seconds.
DOOR ACTIVATED
ON The ceiling light (with the switch in
the door activated position) comes on
when you remove the key from the

ignition switch. If you do not open a
OFF door, the light fades out in about 30
seconds.
If you leave any door open without
the key in the ignition switch, the
ceiling light will go off after 15
minutes.
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch: ON, Door Activated, and
OFF. In the Door Activated (center)
position, the light comes on when
you:
Open any door.
Unlock the doors and the tailgate
with the key or the remote
transmitter (if equipped).
107
108
Features
The heating and air conditioning Vents, Heating, and A/C ............. 110 Disc Player Error Messages
system in your vehicle provides a Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation
comfortable driving environment in (Models without navigation system) ............................... 157
all weather conditions. system) ............................... 115 Playing a PC card (Models with
Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system) .................. 158
The standard audio system has many
navigation system) .................. 122 Playing an iPod (Models with
features. This section describes
Disc Player Error Messages navigation system) .................. 170
those features and how to use them.
Features
(Models without navigation iPod Error Messages (Models
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio system) ............................... 128 with navigation system) .......... 176
system that requires a code number Playing an iPod (Models without Playing a USB Flash Memory
to enable it. navigation system) .................. 129 Device (Models with
The security system helps to iPod Error Messages (Models navigation system) .............. 177
discourage vandalism and theft of without navigation system) ..... 135 USB Flash Memory Device Error
your vehicle. Playing a USB Flash Memory Messages (Models with
Device (Models without navigation system) .............. 183
navigation system) .............. 136 FM/AM Radio Reception ............ 184
USB Flash Memory Device Error Protecting Your Discs ................. 186
Messages (Models without Remote Audio Controls ............... 189
navigation system) .............. 142 Auxiliary Input Jack .................... 190
Playing the AM/FM Radio Radio Theft Protection ................ 191
(Models with navigation Setting the Clock......................... 192
system) ............................... 143 Security System .......................... 193
Playing a Disc (Models with Cruise Control ............................ 194
navigation system) .................. 149
109
Vents, Heating, and A/C
FAN CONTROL DIAL
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/

HEATED MIRRORS BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING REAR WINDOW

BUTTON DEFOGGER BUTTON
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
MODE CONTROL DIAL FRESH AIR/RECIRCULATION LEVER
: If equipped
110
Airflow Controls The outside air intakes for the Mode Control Dial
Fan Control Dial heating and cooling system are at the Use the mode control dial to select
Turn this dial to increase or decrease base of the windshield. Keep this the vents the air flows from. Some air
the fan speed and airflow. area clear of leaves and other debris. will flow from the dashboard corner
vents in all modes.
Temperature Control Dial The system should be left in fresh air
Turning this dial clockwise increases mode under almost all conditions. Air flows from the center and
the temperature of the airflow. Keeping the system in recirculation corner vents in the dashboard.
Features
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button can cause the windows to fog up. Airflow is divided between the
If equipped vents in the dashboard and the floor
This button turns the air Switch to recirculation mode when vents.
conditioning on and off. The driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air Air flows from the floor vents.
indicator in the button is on when the
A/C is on. mode. Airflow is divided between the
Fresh Air/Recirculation Lever Rear Window Defogger floor vents and defroster vents at the
This lever controls the source of the Button / base of the windshield.
air going into the system. When you This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page 76). Air flows from the defroster
slide the lever to the side, air is vents at the base of the windshield.
brought in from outside the vehicle On some models, this button also
(fresh air mode). When you select operates the heated outside mirrors
the side, air from the vehicle's (see page 102).
interior is sent through the system
again (recirculation mode).
CONTINUED
111
When you select or , the Using the Heater Using the A/C
system automatically turns on the The heater uses engine coolant to If equipped
A/C (if equipped). You cannot turn warm the air. If the engine is cold, it Air conditioning places an extra load
the A/C off in this mode. will be several minutes before you on the engine. Check the high
feel warm air coming from the temperature indicator (see page 63).
Ventilation system. If the indicator begins to blink, turn
The flow-through ventilation system off the A/C until the indicator goes
draws in outside air, circulates it 1. Select and .
off.
through the interior, then discharges 2. Set the fan to the desired speed.
it through vents near the tailgate. 1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with button. The indicator in the button
1. Set the temperature to the lower the temperature control dial. comes on when a fan speed is
limit. selected.
2. Make sure the A/C is off. 2. Make sure the temperature is set
3. Select and . to maximum cool.
4. Set the fan to the desired speed. 3. Select .
4. If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select .
5. Set the fan to the desired speed.
112
If the interior is very warm, you can To Defog and Defrost When you select or , the
cool it down more rapidly by partially To remove fog from the inside of the system automatically turns on the
opening the windows, turning on the windows: A/C. This helps to dehumidify the air
A/C, and setting the fan to maximum 1. Set the fan to the desired speed or and to defog the windshield. In either
speed in . mode, you cannot turn off the A/C.
high for faster defrosting.
Dehumidify the Interior When you switch to another mode,
2. Select by sliding the lever. the A/C returns to its original
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
Features
moisture from the air. When used in 3. Select . The system setting, either on or off, as indicated
combination with the heater, it automatically turns on the A/C (if by the A/C indicator.
makes the interior warm and dry and equipped). The A/C indicator will
can prevent the windows from not come on if it was previously off.
fogging up.
4. Adjust the temperature so the
1. Turn the fan on. airflow feels warm.
2. If the A/C is off, turn it on (if 5. Select / to help clear the
equipped). rear window.
3. Select and . 6. To increase airflow to the
Adjust the temperature to your windshield, close the corner vents.
preference.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32F (0C).
CONTINUED
113
To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice To Turn Everything Off

From the Windows Turning the fan speed control dial all
1. Set the fan and temperature the way to the left shuts the system
controls to maximum level. off.
2. Select . The system
Keep the system off for short
automatically turns on the A/C (if periods only.
equipped). The A/C indicator does
To keep stale air and mustiness
not come on if it was previously off.
from collecting, you should have
3. Select . the fan running at all times.
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating each vent. This sends more
warm air to the windshield defroster
vents. Once the windshield is clear,
select fresh air mode to avoid
fogging the windows.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
114
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)
DISPLAY BUTTON
Features
VOL/SELECT
KNOB
POWER ( ) BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
FM/AM BUTTON AUTO SELECT

BUTTON
TUNE/SEEK TUNE/SEEK
( (
SEEK) SEEK)
BUTTON BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
SOUND ( / ) BUTTON SCAN BUTTON

PLAY BUTTON
CONTINUED
115
To Play the FM/AM Radio TUNE Use the TUNE/SEEK SEEK The SEEK function
The ignition switch must be in the button to tune to a desired searches up and down from the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. frequency. Press the button to current frequency to find a station
Turn the system on by pushing the tune to a higher frequency, and the with a strong signal. To activate it,
FM/AM button. Adjust the volume button to tune to a lower press and hold the or side of
by turning the VOL/SELECT knob. frequency. the TUNE/SEEK button until you
The band and frequency that the hear a beep, then release it.
You can also operate the tune
radio was last tuned to are displayed. function by using the VOL/SELECT SCAN The scan function samples
To change bands, press the FM/AM knob. all stations with strong signals on the
button. On the FM band, ST will be Press the VOL/ SELECT knob and selected band. To activate it, press
displayed if the station is you will see SEL in the display. the SCAN button, then release it.
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo Turn the knob right to tune to a You will see SCAN in the display.
reproduction in AM is not available. higher frequency, or left to tune to a The system will scan for a station
To Select a Station lower frequency. with a strong signal. When it finds
You can use any of five methods to To turn it off, press the VOL/ one, it will stop and play that station
find radio stations on the selected SELECT knob or button, or for about 10 seconds.
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset PLAY button. If you do nothing, the system will
buttons, and auto select. The system will return to the normal then scan for the next strong station
display about 10 seconds after you and play it for 10 seconds. When it
stop adjusting the tune mode. plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
116
PRESET Each preset button (1 AUTO SELECT If you are You will see a 0 displayed after
6) can store one frequency on AM, traveling far from home and can no pressing a preset button if auto select
and two frequencies on FM. longer receive your preset stations, cannot find a strong station for that
1. Select the desired band, AM or you can use the auto select feature to preset button.
find stations in the local area.
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store If you do not like the stations auto
two frequencies with each preset Press the A.SEL button. A.SEL select has stored, you can store other
button. flashes in the display, and the system frequencies on the preset buttons as
Features
goes into scan mode for several previously described.
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
function to tune the radio to a To turn off auto select, press the A.SEL
six AM and twelve FM stations in the
desired station. (auto select) button. This restores
preset buttons.
the presets you originally set.
3. Pick a preset number (16), and
hold it until you hear a beep. For information on FM/AM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
184.
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
CONTINUED
117
Radio Data System (RDS) If the station you are listening to is

On the FM band, you can select a not an RDS station, the display
favorite station and display the continues to show the frequency with
program service name according to the PS name display function on.
the information provided by the radio
When you turn off this function by
data system (RDS).
pressing the TITLE button, the
Program Service (PS) Name Display display shows RDS INFO OFF.
The program service name display
function shows the name of the PROGRAM SERVICE
station you are listening to. With the NAME DISPLAY ON
audio system on and the FM band
selected, you can turn this function
on or off. To switch the function between on
and off, press and release the TITLE
button. With the system on, you will
see the RDS INFO ON message on
the display. If the station you are
listening to is an RDS station, the
displayed frequency switches to the
station name.
118
Radio Data System (RDS) Category ALL: All RDS category stations Press or PLAY button to
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft select an RDS category. The display
rock music shows the selected RDS category
COUNTRY: Country music name for about 10 seconds. You can
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music use the search or scan function to
TOP 40: Top 40 hits find radio stations in the selected
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies RDS category. If you do nothing
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft while the RDS category name is
Features
rhythm and blues displayed, the selected category is
RELIGION: Religious music and canceled.
RDS CATEGORY religious talk RDS Program Search
CLASSIC: Classical music This function searches up and down
JAZZ: Jazz a frequency for the strongest signal
INFO: News, information, sports, from the frequencies that carry the
On the FM band selected, you can talk, foreign language, personality,
select the program category provided selected RDS category information.
public, college, and weather This can help you to find a station in
by the RDS. Press or PLAY TRAFFIC: Traffic information
button to display and select an RDS your favorite category. To activate it,
category. The principal RDS press the or side of the
categories are shown as follows; TUNE/SEEK button. You will see
the selected RDS category name
blinking while searching it. When
the system finds a station, the
selected RDS category name will be
displayed again for about 5 seconds.
CONTINUED
119
If the system does not find a station, RDS Program SCAN You can use the RDS program search
NOTHING will be blinking for The scan function samples all or scan function even if the PS name
about 5 seconds, then the system stations with strong signals on the display function is off. In this case,
goes back to the last selected station. selected RDS category. To activate it, the display shows a frequency in
press the SCAN button. You will see place of a PS name.
SCAN in the display. The system
will scan for a station with a strong
signal in the selected RDS category.
You will also see the selected RDS
category name blinking while
searching it. When it finds one, it will
stop and play that station for about 10
seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
If the system does not find a station,
NOTHING will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
120
Adjusting the Sound SVC Adjusts the volume level Audio System Lighting
Press the SOUND ( ) button to based on the vehicle speed. You can use the instrument panel
select an appropriate setting: bass, brightness control knob to adjust the
The system will return to the audio
treble, fader, balance, and SVC illumination of the audio system (see
display about 10 seconds after you
(speed-sensitive volume page 76). The audio system
stop adjusting a mode.
compensation). Turn the VOL/ illuminates when the parking lights
SELECT knob to adjust the setting. Speed-sensitive Volume are on, even if the system is turned
Compensation (SVC) off.
Features
BASS Adjusts the bass. The SVC mode controls the volume
TREBLE Adjusts the treble. based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
FADER Adjusts the front-to-back becomes. As you slow down, the
strength of the sound. audio volume decreases.
BALANCE Adjusts the side-to- The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
side strength of the sound. SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
Each mode is shown in the display as HIGH. Turn the VOL/SELECT knob
it changes. Turn the VOL/SELECT to adjust the setting to your liking. If
knob to adjust the setting to your you feel the sound is too loud,
liking. When the level reaches the choose low. If you feel the sound is
center, you will see C in the too quiet, choose high.
display. This function is set to MID as the
default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory.
121
Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system)
CD BUTTON BUTTON DISC SLOT
DISC EJECT
( ) BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP SEEK/SKIP
( (
SEEK) SEEK)
BUTTON BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON VOL/SELECT KNOB PLAY BUTTON REPEAT BUTTON
122
To Play a Disc The in-dash disc player can also play NOTE: If a file on an MP3 or WMA
To load or play discs, the ignition CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in disc is protected by digital rights
switch must be in the ACCESSORY CD-TEXT, MP3, and WMA formats. management (DRM), the audio unit
(I) or ON (II) position. When playing a disc in MP3 or displays UNSUPPORTED, and then
WMA, you will see MP3 or WMA skips to the next file.
You operate the in-dash disc player
in the display. You can see up to 99
with the same controls used for the If you have a disc that is a
folders, and select up to 999 tracks/
radio. To select the disc player, press combination of CD-DA tracks and
files.
Features
the CD button. You will see CD in MP3/WMA files, you can choose the
the display. The folder or track format to listen by pressing the CD
numbers are shown in the display. button.
You can also select the displayed
Video CDs and DVDs will not work
information with the TITLE button
in this unit.
(see page 123). The system will
continuously play a disc until you A disc compressed in AAC format
change modes. cannot be played in this audio
system.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.

The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
CONTINUED
123
The specifications of the compatible To Load a Disc You can see the album, artist, and
MP3 file are: Insert a disc about halfway into the track name in the display. If a disc is
Sampling frequency: disc slot. The drive will pull the disc recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1), 24/ in the rest of the way to play it. You see the folder and file name, and the
22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2) operate the disc player with the same artist, album, and track tag.
Bit rate: controls used for the radio. The
number of the current track is shown With the folder name, you will see
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
in the display. When playing a disc in the FOLDER indicator in the display.
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
MP3 or WMA, the numbers of the The TRACK indicator is shown with
(MPEG1),
current folder and file are shown. the file or track name.
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2) The system will continuously play a When you press the TITLE button
Compatible with variable bit rate and disc until you change modes. while a disc without text data is
multi-session. You cannot load and play 3-inch playing, you will see NO INFO on
Maximum layers (including ROOT): (8-cm) discs in this unit. the display.
8 layers
For information on how to handle The display shows up to about 16
The specifications of the compatible and protect compact discs, see page characters of selected text data (the
WMA file are: 186. folder name, file name, etc.).
Sampling frequency: Text Data Display Function If the text data has more than 16
32/44.1/48 kHz Each time you press the TITLE characters, you will see the first 15
Bit rate: button, the display shows you the characters and the indicator on the
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps text data on a disc, if the disc was display. Press and hold the TITLE
Compatible with variable bit rate and recorded with text data. button until the next 16 characters
multi-session. are shown. You can see up to about
Maximum layers (including ROOT): 31 characters of the text data.
8 layers
124
If you press and hold the TITLE When you turn on the audio system SEEK/SKIP Each time you press
button again, the display shows the next time, the system keeps your the button, the player skips
first 15 characters again. selection with the TITLE button. forward to the beginning of the next
If any letter is not available, it is To Change or Select Tracks/Files track (files in MP3/WMA mode).
replaced with . (dot) in the You can use the SEEK/SKIP button Press the button to skip
display. When the disc has no text while a disc is playing to select backward to the beginning of the
data, you will see NO INFO on the passages and change tracks (files in current track. Press it again to skip to
Features
display. MP3/WMA mode). the beginning of the previous track.
You will also see some text data In MP3/WMA mode, use the To move rapidly within a track, press
under these conditions: or PLAY button to select folders in and hold the or button.
the disc, and use the SEEK/SKIP You can also operate the track
When a new folder, file, or track is button to change files.
selected. selection by using the VOL/SELECT
knob. Press the VOL/SELECT knob
When you change the audio mode and you will see SEL in the display.
to play a disc with text data or in Turn the knob to switch the track
MP3 or WMA. number. Press the VOL/SELECT
When you insert a disc, and the knob or PLAY button to set your
system begins to play. selection. To turn it off, press the
button.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
shown in the display. With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
CONTINUED
125
In MP3/WMA mode In MP3/WMA mode In MP3/WMA mode

FOLDER SELECTION To select FOLDER-REPEAT This feature, FOLDER-RANDOM This
a different folder, press the or when activated, replays all the files feature, when activated, plays the
PLAY button. Press the on the selected folder in the order files in the current folder in random
button to skip to the next folder, and they are compressed in MP3/WMA. order, rather than in the order they
the PLAY button to skip to the To activate folder repeat mode, press are compressed in MP3/WMA. To
previous folder. the RPT button repeatedly until you activate folder random play, press the
see F-RPT in the display. The RDM button. You will see F-RDM
You can also operate the folder and
system continuously replays the in the display. The system will then
file selection by using the VOL/
current folder. Press and hold the select and play files randomly. This
SELECT knob. Press the VOL/
RPT button to turn it off. continues until you deactivate folder
SELECT knob and you will see
random play by pressing and holding
SEL in the display. Turn the knob Each time you press the RPT button,
the RDM button.
to switch the folder number and the mode changes from file repeat to
press the knob to set your selection. folder repeat, then to normal playing. Each time you press the RDM
Turn the knob to switch the file button, the mode changes from
RANDOM (Random within a disc)
number and press the knob to your folder random play, to within a disc
This feature plays the tracks
selection. To turn it off, press the random play, then to normal play.
within a disc in random order. In
button repeatedly.
MP3/WMA mode, all files in all
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE REPEAT) folders are played in random order.
To continuously replay a track To activate random mode, press the
(file in MP3/WMA mode), press the RDM button repeatedly until you see
RPT button. You will see RPT in RDM in the display. Press and hold
the display. Press and hold the RPT the RDM button to turn it off.
button to turn it off.
126
SCAN The scan function samples In MP3/WMA mode To Stop Playing a Disc
all the tracks on the disc in the order FOLDER-SCAN This feature, Press the eject button ( ) to
they are recorded on the disc (all when activated, samples the first file remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
files in the selected folder in MP3 or in each folder on the disc in the but do not remove it from the slot,
WMA mode). To activate the scan order they are recorded. To activate the system will automatically reload
feature, press the SCAN button. You the folder scan feature, press the it after 10 seconds and put it in pause
will see SCAN in the display. You SCAN button repeatedly. You will mode. To begin playing, press the
will get a 10 second sampling of each see F-SCAN in the display. The CD button.
Features
track/file in the disc/folder. Press system will then play the first file in
Press the FM/AM button to switch
and hold the SCAN button to get out the main folders for about 10
to the radio while a disc is playing.
of scan mode and play the last track seconds. If you do nothing, the
Press the CD button to play the disc.
sampled. system will then play the following
first files for 10 seconds each. When If you turn the system off while a disc
the system samples the first file of all is playing, either with the power ( )
folders, F-SCAN is cancelled, and the button or by turning off the ignition
system plays normally. switch, the disc will stay in the drive.
When you turn the system back on,
Each time you press the SCAN
the disc will begin playing where it
button, the mode changes from
left off.
track/file scan to folder scan, then to
normal playing. Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
186.
127
Disc Player Error Messages (Models without navigation system)
The chart on the right explains the Error

error messages you may see in the Cause Solution
Message
display while playing a disc.
Will disappear when the temperature returns
If you see an error message in the HEAT ERROR High Temperature
to normal.
display while playing a disc, press UNSUPPORTED
Track/File format not Current track will be skipped. The next
the eject button. After ejecting the supported supported track or file plays automatically.
BAD DISC Mechanical Error Press the EJECT button and pull out the
disc, check it for damage or PLEASE CHECK disc. Check the disc for serious damage,
deformation. If there is no damage, OWNERS signs of deformation, excessive scratches,
insert the disc again. For the MANUAL PUSH and/or dirt (see page 187). Insert the disc
EJECT again. If the code does not disappear, or the
additional information on damaged BAD DISC Servo Error disc cannot be removed, consult your dealer.
discs, see page 187. PLEASE CHECK Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
OWNERS
The audio system will try to play the MANUAL
disc. If there is still a problem, the BAD DISC DISC Error Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
error message will reappear. Press PLEASE CHECK deformation, excessive scratches, and/or
OWNERS dirt (see page 187).
the eject button, and pull out the MANUAL
disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new disc
plays, there is a problem with the
first disc. If the error message cycle
repeats and you cannot clear it, take
your vehicle to a dealer.
128
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
On Sport model USB INDICATOR iPod INDICATOR BUTTON AUX BUTTON
Features
POWER ( ) BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON

SEEK SEEK
(SKIP ) (SKIP )
BUTTON BUTTON
CONTINUED
129
To Play an iPod Model Software Do not use an extension cable

This audio system can operate the iPod classic Ver. 1.0 or more between the USB adapter cable
audio files on the iPod with the iPod with Ver. 1.2 or more equipped with your vehicle and
same controls used for the in-dash video your dock connector.
(iPod 5th
disc player. To play an iPod, connect generation) We recommend backing up your
it to the USB adapter cable in the iPod nano Ver. 1.2 or more data before playing it.
upper glove box by using your dock iPod nano 2nd Ver. 1.1.2 or more
connector, then press the AUX generation In AAC format, DRM (digital rights
button. The ignition switch must be iPod nano 3rd Ver. 1.0 or more management) files cannot be played.
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) generation If the system finds a DRM file, the
position. The iPod will also be iPod touch Ver. 1.1.1 or more audio unit displays UNPLAYABLE,
recharged with the ignition switch in and then skips to the next file.
Use only compatible iPods with the
these positions.
latest software. iPods that are not
The audio system reads and plays compatible will not work in this audio
sound files to be playable on the unit.
iPod. The system cannot operate an
NOTE:
iPod as a mass storage device. The
system will only play songs stored on Do not connect your iPod using a
the iPod with iTunes. HUB.
iPod and iTunes are registered Do not keep the iPod in the
trademarks owned by Apple Inc. vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
heat will damage it.
iPods compatible with your audio
system using the USB adapter cable
are:
130
Connecting an iPod DOCK CONNECTOR Text Data Display Function

Each time you press the TITLE
USB CONNECTOR
button the display mode switches
between the album name, the song
name, the artist name, or name off
(which turns off the text display).
Features
USB CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER CABLE 2. Connect your dock connector to
the iPod correctly and securely.
1. Open the upper glove box, and pull
out the USB adapter cable. 3. Install the dock connector to the
USB connector securely.
CONTINUED
131
The display shows up to about 16 To Change or Select Files SKIP Each time you press the
characters of the selected data. If the Use the SKIP button while an iPod is (SKIP ) button, the system skips
text data has more than 16 playing to select passages and forward to the beginning of the next
characters, you will see the first 15 change files. file. Press the (SKIP ) button,
characters and the indicator in the to skip backward to the beginning of
display. Press and hold the TITLE the current file. Press it again to skip
button until the next 16 characters to the beginning of the previous file.
are shown.
To move rapidly within a file, press
and hold either side ( or ) of
the SKIP button.
132
The display shows items on the To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode:

selected list. Turn the VOL/SELECT You can select any type of repeat and
knob to select an item, then press the shuffle mode by using the RPT
VOL/SELECT knob to set your button or the RDM button.
selection. REPEAT This feature
Press the VOL/
SELECT knob. If you select ALL, all available files continuously plays a file. To activate
on the selected list are played. the repeat feature, press the RPT
Features
button. You will see RPT in the
Pressing the button goes back display. To turn it off, press the RPT
to the previous display and pressing button again.
the TITLE button cancels this setting
mode. SHUFFLE ALL This feature
You can also select a file from any list plays all available files in a selected
on the iPod menu: playlists, artists, list (playlists, artists, albums or
albums and songs, by using the songs) in random order. To activate
VOL/SELECT knob. Push the VOL/ the shuffle all feature, press the RDM
SELECT knob to switch the display button. You will see RDM in the
to an iPod menu, then turn the VOL/ display. To turn it off, press and hold
SELECT knob to select a desired list. the RDM button.
Press the VOL/SELECT knob to set
your selection.
CONTINUED
133
SHUFFLE ALBUM This feature To Stop Playing Your iPod When you disconnect the iPod while
plays all available albums in a To play the radio when an iPod is it is playing, the display shows USB
selected list (playlists, artists, albums playing, press the FM/AM button. If NO DATA.
or songs) in random order. The files a disc is in the audio unit, press the iPod Error Messages
in each album are played in the CD button to play the disc.
If you see an error message in the
recorded order. To activate the Disconnecting an iPod display, see page 135.
shuffle album feature, press the You can disconnect the iPod at any
RDM button repeatedly. You will see time when you see OK to
F-RDM in the display. To turn it Disconnect message in the iPod
off, press and hold the RDM button. display. Always make sure you see
Each time you press the RDM OK to Disconnect message in the
button, the mode changes from iPod display before you disconnect it.
shuffle all play to shuffle album play, Make sure to follow the iPod's
then to normal playing. instructions on how to disconnect the
dock connector from the USB
adapter cable.
: The displayed message may vary
on models or versions. On some
models, there is no message to
disconnect.
If you reconnect the same iPod, the
system may begin playing where it
left off, depending on what mode the
iPod is in when it is reconnected.
134
iPod Error Messages (Models without navigation system)
If you see an error message on the Error

audio display while playing an iPod, Solution
Message
find the solution in the chart to the
right. If you cannot clear the error The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the iPod. There is a
UNPLAYABLE FILE
possibility that the files have been damaged.
message, take your vehicle to your UNSUPPORTED
dealer. Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.
VER.
Features
135
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
On Sport model USB INDICATOR BUTTON AUX BUTTON
POWER ( ) BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON

SEEK SEEK
(SKIP ) (SKIP )
BUTTON BUTTON
136
To Play a USB Flash Memory The recommended USB flash We recommend backing up your
Device memory devices are 256 Mbyte or data before playing a USB flash
This audio system can operate the higher, and formatted with the FAT memory device.
audio files on a USB flash memory file system. Some digital audio Depending on the type and
device with the same controls used players may be compatible as well.
number of files, it may take some
for the in-dash disc player. To play a
Some USB flash memory device time before they begin to play.
USB flash memory device, connect it
(such as devices with security
to the USB adapter cable in the Depending on the software the
Features

lockout features, etc.) will not work
upper glove box, then press the AUX files were made with, it may not be
in this audio unit.
button. The ignition switch must be possible to play some files, or
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) NOTE: display some text data.
position. Do not use a device such as a card

The specifications for compatible
The audio system reads and plays reader or hard drive as the device MP3 files are:
the audio files on the USB flash or your files may be damaged. Sampling frequency:
memory device in MP3, WMA or Do not connect your USB flash 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
AAC formats. Depending on the memory device using a HUB. 16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
format, the display shows MP3,
WMA or AAC when a USB flash Do not use an extension cable to Bit rate:
memory device is playing. The USB the USB adapter cable equipped 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
flash memory device limit is up to with your vehicle. 160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps
700 folders or up to 65535 files. (MPEG1)
Do not keep the USB flash
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
: Only AAC format files recorded memory device in the vehicle.
112/128/144/160/VBR kbps
with iTunes are playable on this Direct sunlight and high heat will
(MPEG2)
audio unit. damage it.
CONTINUED
137
Supported standards: Bit rate: Connecting a USB Flash Memory

MPEG1 Audio Layer3 8 320 kbps Device
MPEG2 Audio LSF Layer3 Supported standards: USB CONNECTOR
Partition: Top partition only MPEG4/AAC LC
Maximum layers: 8 MPEG2/AAC LC
Partition: Top partition only
WMA files are: Maximum layers: 8
Sampling frequency: Even if recorded in MP3, WMA or
32/44.1/48 kHz AAC format, a file with unsupported
Bit rate: version cannot be played. If the
system finds it, the audio unit
48 320/VBR kbps (Max 384)
displays UNSUPPORTED, and then USB ADAPTER CABLE
Supported standards: skips to the next file. 1. Open the upper glove box, and pull
WMA version 7/8/9 out the USB adapter cable.
In WMA or AAC format, DRM
Partition: Top partition only (digital rights management) files
Maximum layers: 8 cannot be played. If the system finds
a DRM file, the audio unit displays
The specifications for compatible UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips
AAC files are: to the next file.
Sampling frequency:
8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/
44.1/48 kHz
138
Text Data Display Function To Change or Select Files

Each time you press the TITLE Use the SKIP button while a USB
button, the display mode shows you flash memory device is playing to
in sequence, the folder name, the file select passages and change files.
name, the artist name, the album
name, the song name, or name off SKIP Each time you press the
(which turns off the text display). (SKIP ) button, the system skips
forward to the beginning of the next
Features
The display shows up to about 16 file. Press the (SKIP ) button,
characters of the selected data. If the to skip backward to the beginning of
text data has more than 16 the current file. Press it again to skip
USB CONNECTOR characters, you will see the first 15 to the beginning of the previous file.
characters and the indicator in the
2. Connect the USB flash memory display. Press and hold the TITLE To move rapidly within a file, press
device to the USB connector button until the next 16 characters and hold either side ( or ) of
correctly and securely. are shown. the SKIP button.
When the USB flash memory device FOLDER SELECTION To select
is connected, the USB indicator is a different folder, press the
shown in the display. button or PLAY button. Press the
button to skip to the next
folder, and press the PLAY button
to skip to the beginning of the
previous folder.
CONTINUED
139
To Select a File from Folder and File To Select Repeat, Random or Scan RANDOM This feature plays all
Lists Mode: the files in random order. To activate
You can select any type of repeat, the track random feature, press the
random and scan modes by using the RDM button. You will see RDM in
Folder Selection RPT button or RDM button, or SCAN the display. To turn it off, press and
button. hold the RDM button.
REPEAT This feature FOLDER RANDOM This feature
Press the VOL/ continuously plays a file. To activate plays the files in the selected folder
SELECT knob. the repeat feature, press the RPT
Track Selection in random order. To activate the
button. You will see RPT in the folder random feature, press the
display. To turn it off, press and hold RDM button repeatedly. You will see
the RPT button. F-RDM in the display. To turn it
FOLDER REPEAT This feature off, press and hold the RDM button.
replays all the files in the selected Each time you press the RDM
You can also select a folder or file by folder in the order they are stored.
using the VOL/SELECT knob. Push button, the mode changes from track
To activate the folder repeat feature, random play to folder random play,
the VOL/SELECT knob to switch the press the RPT button repeatedly. You
display to the folder or file list, then then to normal playing.
will see F-RPT in the display. To
turn the VOL/SELECT knob to turn it off, press and hold the RPT
select a folder or file. Press the VOL/ button.
SELECT knob to set your selection.
Each time you press the RPT button,
Pressing the button goes back the mode changes from file repeat to
to the previous display and pressing folder repeat, then to normal playing.
the TITLE button cancels this setting
mode.
140
SCAN This feature samples all To Stop Playing a USB Flash USB Flash Memory Device Error
files in the selected folder in the Memory Device Messages
order they are stored. To activate the To play the radio when a USB flash If you see an error message in the
scan feature, press the SCAN button. memory device is playing, press the display, see page 142.
You will see SCAN in the display. FM/AM button. If a disc is in the
You will get a 10 second sampling of audio unit, press the CD button to
each file in the folder. Press and hold play the disc.
the SCAN button to get out of the
Features
Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory
scan mode and play the last file Device
sampled. You can disconnect the USB flash
FOLDER SCAN This feature memory device in any time even if
samples the first file in each folder in the USB mode is selected on the
the order they are stored. To activate audio system. Always follow the USB
the folder scan feature, press the flash memory device's instructions
SCAN button repeatedly. You will when you remove it.
see F-SCAN in the display. You will When you disconnect the USB flash
get a 10 second sampling of each first memory device while it is playing,
file in the folder(s). Press and hold the display shows USB NO DATA.
the SCAN button to get out of the
folder scan mode and play the last If you reconnect the same USB flash
file sampled. memory device, the system will
begin playing where it left off.
Each time you press the SCAN
button, the mode changes from file
scan to folder scan, then to normal
playing.
141
USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

audio display while playing a USB Solution
Message
flash memory device, find the
solution in the chart to the right. If UNPLAYABLE The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flash memory
FILE device. There is a possibility that the files have been damaged.
you cannot clear the error message, Appears when the unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.
UNSUPPORTED
take your vehicle to your dealer.
142
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
POWER/VOLUME KNOB FM1 ICON AM ICON SOUND ICON

FM2 ICON AUTO SELECT ICON BACK GROUND ICON
Features
AM/FM
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
TUNE BAR
PRESET BUTTONS
CONTINUED
143
Voice Control System You can also operate the audio To Select a Station
In addition to the standard audio system without using the control You can use any of five methods to
controls, the audio system in your icons on the audio screen. Use the find radio stations on the selected
vehicle can be operated using the control buttons on the left side of the band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
voice control system. See the screen. The status bar appears on the buttons, and auto select.
navigation system manual for bottom of the screen each time you
TUNE Use the TUNE bar to tune
complete details. operate any of the control buttons.
the radio to a desired frequency.
On the navigation screen, you can
To Play the AM/FM Radio Press the side of the bar to tune to
The ignition switch must be in the also see audio information by
a higher frequency, and press the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. touching the AUDIO INFO icon on
side to tune to a lower frequency.
Turn the system on by pushing the the lower of the screen.
Press and hold the or side of the
power/volume knob or the AM/FM The band and frequency that the
TUNE bar until you hear two beeps
button. Adjust the volume by turning radio was last turned to are
to change the frequency rapidly.
the power/volume knob. displayed. To change bands, press
Release the bar when the display
Pushing the AUDIO button will also the AM/FM button, or touch the
reaches the desired frequency.
turn on the system. desired band icon (FM1, FM2, or
AM). On the FM band, STEREO will
be displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
144
SEEK The SEEK function If you do nothing, the system will Each preset button's frequency is
searches up and down from the then scan for the next strong station shown on the bottom of the audio
current frequency to find a station and play it for 10 seconds. When it display.
with a strong signal. To activate it, plays a station you want to listen to,
press and hold the or side of the press the SCAN button again.
TUNE bar until you hear a beep,
Preset Each preset button can
then release it.
store one frequency on AM and two
Features
SCAN The SCAN function frequencies on FM.
samples all stations with strong
1. Select the desired band, AM or
signals on the selected band. To
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
activate it, press the SCAN button,
two frequencies with each preset
then release it. You will see SCAN in
button.
the display. The system will scan for
a station with a strong signal. When 2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
it finds one, it will stop and play that function to tune the radio to a
station for about 10 seconds. desired station.
3. Pick a preset button, and hold it
until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
CONTINUED
145
AUTO SELECT If you are You will see a 0 displayed after Adjusting the Sound
traveling far from home and can no pressing a preset button if auto select
longer receive your preset stations, cannot find a strong station for every
you can use the auto select feature to preset button.
find stations in the local area.
If you do not like the stations auto
Press the AUDIO button to view the select has stored, you can store other
audio control icons, then touch the frequencies on the preset buttons as
AUTO SEL icon. You will see AUTO previously described.
SEL flashing in the display, and the
To turn off auto select, touch the
system goes into scan mode for
AUTO SEL icon . This restores the
several seconds. It stores the
presets you originally set.
frequencies of six AM, and twelve SOUND ICON
FM stations in the preset buttons. For information on FM/AM radio
frequencies and reception, see page You can adjust the sound on the
184. navigation screen. To adjust the
sound, push the AUDIO button, then
enter the sound grid by touching the
SOUND icon on the display.
146
FADER Adjusts the front-to-back This function is set to MID as the

SPEAKER SETTING strength of the sound. To adjust the default setting when the vehicle
front/rear fader, touch the FR or RR leaves the factory. If you feel the
icon. sound is too loud, choose low. If you
feel the sound is too quiet, choose
BALANCE Adjusts the side-to-
Hi.
side strength of the sound.
To adjust the left/right balance, You can also select the icon with the
Features
touch the L or R icon. joystick. Move it up and down to
move the highlighting and scroll
The right upper display shows you
through lists. Select the icon, then
BASS/TREBLE SETTING the current setting of the sound
enter the joystick.
strength coming from each speaker.
BASS Adjusts the bass. SVC (speed-sensitive volume
The system will return to the audio
display about 10 seconds after you
TREBLE Adjusts the treble. To compensation) The SVC mode
stop adjusting a mode.
adjust the treble and bass, touch controls the volume based on vehicle
or on each side of the treble or speed. The faster you go, the louder
bass adjustment bar. The adjustment the audio volume becomes. As you
bar on the right lower display shows slow down, the audio volume
you the current setting. decreases. Touch the appropriate
icon (Low, Mid, Hi, Off) to select the
mode.
CONTINUED
147
Screen Mode Audio System Lighting

You can select the background You can use the instrument panel
screen to display the sound level. brightness control knob to adjust the
There are three screen modes: level illumination of the control panel (see
(the sound level is shown with the page 76). The audio system
vertical bars), spectrum analysis (the illuminates when the parking lights
sound level appears as ripples of are on, even if the radio is turned off.
water), and off. Each time you touch
the background icon, the display
changes.
148
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
CD ICON
POWER/VOLUME JOYSTICK
KNOB
Features
OPEN BUTTON
CD/AUX BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
TUNE FOLDER
BAR
RANDOM FAST FORWARD SKIP BUTTON

BUTTON BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON REWIND BUTTON SKIP BUTTON
CONTINUED
149
To Play a Disc If you have a disc that is a Maximum layers

(In-dash single player) combination of CD-DA tracks and (including ROOT): 8 layers
You operate the in-dash disc player MP3/WMA files, you can choose the
format to listen by pressing and The specifications for compatible
with the same controls used for the
holding CD/AUX button until you WMA files are:
radio. To load or play discs, the
ignition switch must be in the hear a beep. Sampling frequency:
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. Video CDs and DVD discs do not 32/44.1/48 kHz
work in this unit. Bit rate:
A disc compressed in AAC format 32/40/48/64/80/96/128/160/192
cannot be played in this audio system. kbps
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the The specifications for compatible Compatible with variable bit rate
disc to jam in the unit. MP3 files are: and multi-session
Sampling frequency: Maximum layers
This audio system can also play 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1) (including ROOT): 8 layers
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in 24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2) NOTE:
MP3 or WMA formats. When playing Bit rate: If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
a disc in MP3, you will see MP3 on protected by digital rights
the screen. In WMA format, WMA 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps management (DRM), the audio unit
will appear on the screen. You can displays FILE ERROR, and then
select up to 255 folders and play up (MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/ skips to the next file.
to 999 tracks. If the disc has a
complex structure, it takes a while to 112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
read the disc before the system Compatible with variable bit rate
begins to play it. and multi-session
150
To Load a Disc DISC SLOT CLOSE BUTTON
Features
OPEN BUTTON Insert a disc about halfway into the To return the screen to the upright
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc position, press the CLOSE button on
The in-dash disc player is behind the
in the rest of the way and begin to the edge of the screen panel. Do not
navigation screen. To use the disc
play it. use the folded screen as a tray. If you
player, press the OPEN button
put a cup, for example, on the screen,
beside the screen. The screen folds You cannot load and play 3-inch (8-
the liquid inside the cup may spill on
back, and the disc slot appears. cm) discs in this system.
the screen when you go over a bump.
CONTINUED
151
Press the AUDIO button beside the To Change or Select Tracks/Files You can also select an icon with the
screen to show the audio display and joystick. Move it to left, right, up, or
operate the in-dash disc player. PRESET BUTTON'S FUNCTION down to change the highlighting and
scroll through lists. Then press the
You can also operate the audio
ENT on the top of the joystick to
system without using the control
select the icon.
icons on the audio screen. Press the
CD/AUX button. The status bar SKIP Each time you press
appears on the bottom of the screen. (preset 6), the player skips forward
On the navigation screen, you can to the beginning of the next track
see the audio information whenever (file in MP3 or WMA mode). Press
you touch the AUDIO INFO or (preset 5), to skip backward to
TRACK LIST icons on the lower of the beginning of the current track.
PRESET BUTTONS
the screen. Press it again to skip to the
You can use the preset buttons while beginning of the previous track.
When playing a CD recorded with
text data, the track, album, and artist a disc is playing to select passages FF/REW To move rapidly within
name are shown on the audio and change tracks (files in MP3 or a track/file, press and hold
display. When playing a disc in MP3 WMA mode). Each preset button's (preset 4) or (preset 3).
or WMA, the folder number and function is shown on the bottom of
name, the file number and name, the the screen.
artist name, and the elapsed time are
shown. The system will continuously
play a disc until you change modes.
If the disc was not recorded with text
data, it will not be displayed.
152
In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER SELECTION To select FOLDER REPEAT This feature, FOLDER RANDOM This
a different folder, press either side of when activated, replays all files on feature, when activated, plays all files
the TUNE FOLDER bar to move to the selected folder in the order they in the selected folder in random
the beginning of the next folder. are compressed. To activate folder order, rather than in the order they
Press the side of the TUNE repeat, press and hold the RPT are compressed. To activate folder
FOLDER bar to skip to the next button (preset 1) for 2 seconds. You random, press and hold the RDM
folder, and the side to move to the will see FOLDER REPEAT in the button. You will see FOLDER
Features
beginning of the current folder. display. The system continuously RANDOM in the display. The
Press it again to skip to the replays the current folder. Press the system then selects and plays files
beginning of the previous folder. RPT button again to turn it off. randomly. This continues until you
Selecting a different folder with the deactivate folder random by pressing
TRACK REPEAT (FILE REPEAT)
TUNE FOLDER bar also turns off the RDM button again, or if you
To continuously replay a track
folder repeat. select a different folder with the
(file in MP3 or WMA mode), press
TUNE FOLDER bar.
the RPT button (preset 1). You will TRACK RANDOM (Random
see TRACK REPEAT in the within a disc/folder) This
display. Press the RPT button again feature plays the tracks/files within a
to turn it off. disc in random order. To activate
track random, press the RDM button
(preset 2). You will see TRACK
RANDOM in the display. Press the
RDM button again to return to
normal play.
CONTINUED
153
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) In MP3 or WMA mode Using a Track List

The scan function samples all tracks FOLDER SCAN This feature,
(files in MP3 or WMA) in the order when activated, samples all the first FOLDER ICON TRACK/FILE ICON
they were recorded. To activate scan, files in each folder on the disc in
press the SCAN button. You will see order. To activate folder scan, press
TRACK SCAN in the display. You and hold the SCAN button for 2
will get a 10 second sampling of each seconds. You will see FOLDER
track/file on the disc. Press the SCAN in the display.
SCAN button to get out of scan mode
The system plays the first file in each
and play the last track/file sampled.
folder for about 10 seconds. If you do
Pressing either SKIP button (preset nothing, the system then plays the
5 or 6) also turns off scan. first file in each folder for 10 seconds FOLDER NUMBER RETURN ICON
each. After playing the first file of the
last folder, the system goes to normal You can also select a track/file
playing. directly from a track list on the audio
Pressing either SKIP button (preset display. Press the AUDIO button to
5 or 6), or selecting a different folder show the audio display, then touch
with the TUNE FOLDER bar, or the Track List icon. The track list
pressing the SCAN button, also turns menu appears on the display.
off folder scan.
154
When playing a CD recorded with Select the desired track/file by To Stop Playing a Disc
text data, each track name is shown touching the icon on the display. The To play the radio when a disc is
on the audio display. With a disc selected icon will be highlighted in playing, press the AM/FM button or
recorded in MP3 or WMA, the folder blue. The system begins to play the touch the FM1, FM2, or AM icon. If
number and the location are also selected track/file. With a disc in a PC card is in the audio unit, touch
displayed. MP3 or WMA, touch the folder icon the CARD icon to play the PC card.
on the upper left of the screen to Press the CD/AUX button again or
If the disc was not recorded with text
move to the root folder. The current touch the CD icon to switch back to
Features
data, only the track number is
folder is highlighted in blue. the in-dash disc player.
shown.
If you turn the system off while a disc
To scroll through the display, touch
is playing, either with the power/
the or icon on the side of the
volume knob or by turning off the
screen. To go back to the previous
ignition switch, the disc will stay in
display, touch the Return icon on the
the drive. When you turn the system
screen.
back on, the disc will begin playing
where it left off.
CONTINUED
155
Removing a Disc Protecting Discs

To remove a disc from the audio unit, For information on how to handle
fold back the screen by pressing the and protect discs, see page 186.
OPEN button (see page 150). Press
the disc eject button ( ) to remove
the disc. If you eject the disc, but do
not remove it from the slot, the
system will automatically reload it
after 10 seconds and put it in pause
mode. To begin playing, press the
CD/AUX button.
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the CLOSE button.
You cannot close the screen if a disc
is partially inserted into its slot.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
156
Disc Player Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
If you see an error message in the Error

display while playing a disc, find the Cause Solution
Message
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc
your vehicle to your dealer. CHECK DISC FOCUS Error player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or
The chart on the right explains the damaged.
error messages you may see in the Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Features
display while playing a disc. Check the disc for damage or deformation.
MECH ERROR Mechanical Error If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the error
If you see an error message in the message does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your dealer.
display while playing a disc, press CHECK DISC Disc Format Error Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
the eject button. After ejecting the Check the disc for damage or deformation.
disc, check it for damage or HEAT ERROR High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
deformation. If there is no damage, normal.
insert the disc again.
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the
disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new disc
plays, there is a problem with the
first disc. If the error message cycle
repeats and you cannot clear it, take
your vehicle to a dealer.
157
Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)
POWER/VOLUME KNOB PC CARD ICON

TRACK LIST ICON
JOYSTICK
OPEN BUTTON
PLAY MODE
ICON
CD/AUX BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
TUNE FOLDER
BAR
REPEAT BUTTON REWIND BUTTON SKIP BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON FAST FORWARD BUTTON SKIP BUTTON
158
To Play a PC card Always use the recommended Never insert foreign objects into
You operate the PC card player with memory card with the appropriate the PC card slot.
the same controls used for the radio adapter (if an adapter is needed).
and the in-dash disc player. To load Some memory cards will not work in
MP3 files are:
or play a card, the ignition switch this unit.
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or Sampling frequency:
NOTE: 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
ON (II) position.
When you insert a PC card into the 24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
Features

The PC card player reads and plays
slot, make sure you put it in Bit rate:
cards in MP3 or WMA formats.
straight. If you cannot insert it,
Depending on the format, the screen 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
remove it, and insert again.
will indicate MP3 or WMA when 160/192/224/256/320 kbps
a card is playing. The card limit of Do not keep PC cards in the (MPEG1)
the player is 255 folders and 999 vehicle. Direct sunlight and high 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
tracks. If the card has a complex heat will damage them. 112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
structure, it takes some time for the To avoid damaging the card Compatible with variable bit rate
system to begin playing it. reader, do not insert hard disc and multi-session
Based on PCMCIA 2.1/JEIDA 4.2, drive cards into the PC card slot. Maximum layers
the recommended PC cards for the You cannot close the screen (move (including ROOT): 8 layers
PC card reader are: it to the upright position) until the
CompactFlash PC card is inserted all the way into
Flash ATA its slot or removed.
SD memory card
CONTINUED
159
The specifications for compatible Loading a PC Card Insert a PC card straight into the slot.
WMA files are: The drive will read the PC card and
PC CARD SLOT begin to play it.
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz Return the screen to the upright
Bit rate: position by pressing the CLOSE
button on the edge of the screen
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
panel.
Compatible with variable bit rate
Press the AUDIO button beside the
and multi-session
screen to show the audio display and
Maximum layers operate the PC card player.
(including ROOT): 8 layers
You can also operate the audio
In WMA format, DRM (digital rights system without using the control
management) files cannot be played. The PC card slot is behind the icons on the audio screen. Press any
If the system finds a DRM file, it navigation screen. To use the PC of the appropriate control buttons.
skips that file and plays the next card player, press the OPEN button The status bar appears on the bottom
available folder or file. beside the screen. The screen folds of the screen. On the navigation
back, and the PC card slot appears. screen, you can see the audio
information whenever you touch the
AUDIO INFO icon on the screen.
160
There are three play modes: Folder, To Select a Play Mode

Artist, and Album. Touch the PLAY
MODE icon, then choose one of the PLAY MODE ICON
modes by touching its icon. When a
mode is selected, it is highlighted in FOLDER MODE
blue.
Folder mode plays tracks in the MODE INDICATOR
Features
order they were added to the card.
Artist mode plays tracks in
alphabetical order, by artist and
song title.
Album mode plays albums
PLAY MODE ICON PLAY MODE ICON
(folders) in alphabetical order.
ARTIST MODE ALBUM MODE
If play mode information was not
included in the tracks/files when
they were added to the card, it will
not be displayed on the screen.
MODE INDICATOR MODE INDICATOR
CONTINUED
161
PLAY MODE ICON
To select a play mode, push the Select the desired mode by touching After you select the play mode, the
AUDIO button to show the audio the appropriate icon, or move the display changes to the selectable
display, then touch the PLAY MODE joystick, then press the ENT. playing menu. If you select
icon on the display. Continue playing the current song,
the system goes into the selected
play mode after playing the current
file.
162
If you select Play a new track list, To Change or Select Tracks/Files Icons on the screen can also be
the system goes into the selected selected with the joystick. Move the
PRESET BUTTON'S FUNCTION
play mode immediately and begins to joystick left or right and up or down
play the new track list. until the icon is highlighted, then
press the ENT on the top of the
To go back to the previous screen,
joystick to select the icon.
press the CANCEL button on the
right side of the screen. To exit the
Features
play mode screens, press the AUDIO
button.
PRESET BUTTONS
You can use the preset buttons while
a card is playing to select or change
files. Each preset button's function is
shown on the bottom of the screen.
CONTINUED
163
SKIP Each time you press TRACK REPEAT (FILE REPEAT) TRACK RANDOM (Random
(preset 6), the player skips forward To continuously replay a file, within a folder) This feature
to the beginning of the next file. press the RPT button (preset 1). You plays the files within a folder in
Press (preset 5), to skip will see TRACK REPEAT in the random order. To activate random
backward to the beginning of the display. Press the RPT button again play, press the RDM button (preset
current file. Press it again to skip to to turn it off. 2). You will see TRACK RANDOM
the beginning of the previous file. in the display. Press the RDM button
FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
again to return to normal play.
FF/REW To move rapidly within REPEAT This feature, when
a file, press and hold (preset 4) activated, replays all the files on the FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
or (preset 3). selected folder/artist/album in the RANDOM This feature, when
order they are recorded or listed. To activated, plays all files in each
FOLDER SELECTION To select
activate each repeat mode, press and folder/artist/album in random order,
a different folder, press either side of
hold the RPT button (preset 1) for 2 rather than in the order they are
the TUNE FOLDER bar to move the
seconds. You will see FOLDER recorded or listed. To activate each
beginning of the next folder. Press
REPEAT, ARTIST REPEAT or random play, push and hold the
the side of the TUNE FOLDER
ALBUM REPEAT in the display. RDM button (preset 2) for 2 seconds.
bar to skip the next folder, and to the
The system continuously replays the You will see FOLDER RANDOM,
side to move the beginning of the
current folder/artist/album. Press ARTIST RANDOM or ALBUM
current folder. Press it again to skip
and hold the RPT button again to RANDOM in the display.
to the beginning of the previous
turn it off. Pressing the RDM button,
folder.
or selecting a different folder/artist/
album with the TUNE FOLDER bar
also turns off the repeat feature.
164
The system then selects and plays FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM SCAN Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
files randomly. This continues until This feature, when activated, (preset 5 or 6), selecting a different
you deactivate each random play by samples the first file in each folder/ folder/artist/album with the TUNE
pressing the RDM button again. artist/album on the PC card in order. FOLDER bar, or pressing the SCAN
To activate each scan feature, press button, also turns off the scan
SCAN The SCAN function
and hold the SCAN button. You will feature.
samples all the files on the PC card in
see FOLDER SCAN, ARTIST SCAN
the order they are recorded. To
or ALBUM SCAN in the display.
Features
activate the scan feature, press the
SCAN button. You will see TRACK The system plays the first file in the
SCAN in the display. You will get a folder for about 10 seconds. If you do
10 second sampling of each file on nothing, the system plays the first
the PC card. Press the SCAN button file in each folder, in order, for 10
again to get out of scan mode and seconds each. After playing the first
play the last file sampled. file of the last folder/artist/album,
the system returns to normal play.
Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
(preset 5 or 6) also turns off the scan
feature.
CONTINUED
165
Using a Track List

FOLDER ICON ARTIST NAME
RETURN ICON
TRACK LIST ICON
To scroll through the display, touch In artist mode, the artist name is also
the or icon on the side of the displayed on the right side of each
You can also select a file directly
screen. To go back to the previous selectable icon. Select the desired
from a track list on the audio display.
display, touch the Return icon. file.
Press the AUDIO button to show the
audio display, then touch the Track To play a file, touch its icon on the
List icon. The track list menu screen. In folder mode, touch the
appears on the display. folder icon on the upper left of the
screen to move to the root folder.
The current folder is highlighted in
blue.
166
Song Search Function

ALBUM NAME TITLE BY KEYWORD ICON
SONG SEARCH ICON
Features
ARTIST ICON ALBUM ICON
In album mode, the album name is RETURN ICON You can then select any of three
Folder mode is shown.
also displayed on the right side of modes to search a file: Title by
When you select Song Search from
each selectable icon. Select the keyword, Artist, and Album.
the track list display, the song search
desired file.
menu appears.
CONTINUED
167
Searching for a Song Title by keyword FILE LIST Searching for a Song by Artist Name
MORE ICON ARTIST LIST
DELETE ICON LIST ICON After the system searches for a song,
a file list is displayed. To scroll
In Title by keyword mode, enter the Select the Artist icon, and the artist
through the list, touch the or
title name, or any keyword, by list appears. Select the desired artist,
icon on the side of the screen. Select
touching the letter icons on the and the artist's file list is displayed.
the desired file by touching the
screen. Press the List icon to begin
appropriate icon, or moving the
the song search. If you press the
joystick and pressing the ENT.
CANCEL button on the control
panel, the display returns to the
mode menu without doing a search.
To cancel the selected letter, touch
the Delete icon. To select more
characters, touch the More icon. The
other character list will be shown.
168
Searching for a Song by Album Name To Stop Playing a PC card Removing a PC Card
To play the radio when a PC card is To remove a PC card from the audio
ALBUM LIST playing, press the AM/FM button or unit, fold back the screen by
touch the FM1, FM2, or AM icon. If pressing the OPEN button (see page
a disc is in the audio unit, press the 150). Press the eject button ( ) to
CD/AUX button or touch the CD remove the card. If you do not
icon to play the disc. Touch the remove it from the slot, you cannot
CARD icon to switch back to the PC return the screen to the upright
Features
card player. position.
If you turn the system off while a PC To return the screen to the upright
card is playing, either with the position, press the CLOSE button.
power/volume knob or by turning off You can also eject a card when the
the ignition switch, the card will stay ignition switch is off.
Select the Album icon, and the album in the drive. When you turn the
list appears. Select the desired system back on, the card will begin PC Card Player Malfunction
album, and its song list is displayed. playing where it left off. If there is a problem with the PC card
You can then select the desired song player, see your dealer.
When you leave the vehicle, always
from the list. remove the PC card from the audio
unit.
169
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
POWER/VOLUME KNOB USB ICON

iPod INDICATOR
JOYSTICK
CD/AUX BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON SKIP BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON SKIP BUTTON
170
To Play an iPod Voice Control System NOTE:

This audio system can operate the You can select the AUX mode by
using the navigation system voice
Do not connect your iPod using a
audio files on the iPod with the HUB.
same controls used for the in-dash control buttons, but cannot operate
disc player. To play an iPod, connect the play mode functions. Do not keep the iPod in the
it to the USB adapter cable in the iPods compatible with your audio vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
upper glove box by using your dock system using the USB adapter cable heat will damage it.
connector, then press the CD/AUX
Features
are:
Do not use an extension cable
button. The ignition switch must be between the USB adapter cable
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) Model Software
equipped with your vehicle and
position. The iPod will also be iPod classic Ver. 1.0 or more your dock connector.
recharged with the ignition switch in iPod with Ver. 1.2 or more
these positions. video We recommend backing up your
(iPod 5th data before playing it.
The audio system reads and plays generation)
sound files to be playable on the iPod nano Ver. 1.2 or more In AAC format, DRM (digital rights
iPod. The system cannot operate an iPod nano 2nd Ver. 1.1.2 or more management) files cannot be played.
iPod as a mass storage device. The generation If the system finds a DRM file, the
system will only play songs stored on iPod nano 3rd Ver. 1.0 or more audio unit displays UNPLAYABLE,
the iPod with iTunes. generation and then skips to the next file.
iPod touch Ver. 1.1.1 or more
iPod and iTunes are registered
trademarks owned by Apple Inc. Use only compatible iPods with the
latest software. iPods that are not
compatible will not work in this audio
unit.
CONTINUED
171
Connecting an iPod DOCK CONNECTOR If the audio system still does not
USB CONNECTOR
recognize the iPod, the iPod may
need to be reset. Follow the
instructions that came with your
iPod, or you can find reset
instructions online at www.apple.com/
ipod.
The current file number and total of
the selected playable files are
displayed on the screen. It also
USB CONNECTOR shows the artist, album and track
(file) names on the screen.
USB ADAPTER CABLE 2. Connect your dock connector to
the iPod correctly and securely.
1. Open the upper glove box, and pull
out the USB adapter cable. 3. Install the dock connector to the
USB connector securely.
172
To Change or Select Files To Select a File from iPod Menu

Use the SKIP button while an iPod is
playing to select passages and
change files.
SKIP Each time you press the
SKIP button (Preset 6), the
system skips forward to the
Features
beginning of the next file. Press the
SKIP button (Preset 5), to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current file. Press it again to skip to
the beginning of the previous file.
Select the desired mode by touching
the appropriate icon, or move the
You can also select a file from any on
joystick, then press the ENT.
the iPod menu: playlists, artists,
albums and songs. Press the AUDIO If you select ALL on either the
button to display the screen, then artists or albums list, all available
touch the iPod MENU icon. files on the selected list are played.
Press the AUDIO button to go back
to the normal audio playing display.
Pressing the CANCEL button goes
back to the previous screen, and
pressing the MAP button cancels the
audio control display on the screen.
CONTINUED
173
Using a Track List REPEAT This feature

continuously plays a file. To activate
the repeat feature, press the RPT
button (Preset 1). You will see
REPEAT in the display. To turn it
off, press the RPT button (Preset 1)
again.
TRACK RANDOM This feature
plays all available files from the
selected items in the iPod menu list
RETURN ICON (playlists, artists, albums or songs) in
random order. To activate the track
TRACK LIST ICON To scroll through the display, touch random feature, press the RDM
the or icon on the side of the button (Preset 2). You will see
You can also select a file directly
screen. To go back to the previous TRACK RANDOM in the display.
from a track list on the audio display.
display, touch the Return icon. To turn it off, press the RDM button
Press the AUDIO button to show the
audio display, then touch the Track To play a file, touch its icon on the (Preset 2).
List icon. The track list menu screen. The current folder is
appears on the display. highlighted in blue.
To Select Repeat or Random Mode:
You can select any type of repeat and
random mode by using the RPT
button or RDM button.
174
ALBUM RANDOM This feature To Stop Playing Your iPod : The displayed message may vary
plays all available albums from the To play the radio when an iPod is on models or versions. On some
selected items in the iPod menu list playing, press the FM/AM button or models, there is no message to
(playlists, artists, albums or songs) in touch the FM1, FM2, or AM icon. If disconnect.
random order. The files in each a disc is in the audio unit, press the
When you disconnect the iPod while
album are played in the recorded CD/AUX button or touch the CD
it is playing, the navigation screen
order. To activate the album random icon to play the disc. If a PC card is in
shows NO DATA.
feature, press and hold the RDM the audio unit, Press the CD/AUX
Features
button (Preset 2). You will see button or touch the CARD icon to If you reconnect the same iPod, the
ALBUM RANDOM in the display. play a PC card. system may begin playing where it
To turn it off, press and hold the left off, depending on what mode the
Press the CD/AUX button again or
RDM button (Preset 2). iPod is in when it is reconnected.
touch the AUX icon to switch back to
You can also select another list from the iPod. iPod Error Messages
the iPod menu while keeping the Disconnecting an iPod If you see an error message on the
random function. You can disconnect the iPod at any screen, see page 176.
NOTE: time when you see OK to
Disconnect message in the iPod
Available operating function varies display. Always make sure you see
on models or versions. Some OK to Disconnect message in the
functions may not be available on the iPod display before you disconnect it.
vehicle's audio system. Make sure to follow the iPod's
instructions on how to disconnect the
dock connector from the USB
adapter cable.
175
iPod Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

screen while playing an iPod, find the Solution
Message
solution in the chart to the right. If
you cannot clear the error message, UNSUPPORTED Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.
take your vehicle to your dealer. NO SONG Information of music is nothing.
176
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
POWER/VOLUME KNOB USB ICON

WMA/MP3 INDICATOR
JOYSTICK
Features
CD/AUX BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
TUNE FOLDER
BAR
REPEAT BUTTON SKIP BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON SKIP BUTTON
CONTINUED
177
To Play a USB Flash Memory The recommended USB flash We recommend backing up your
Device memory devices are 256 Mbyte or data before playing a USB flash
This audio system can operate the higher, and formatted with the FAT memory device.
audio files on a USB flash memory file system. Some digital audio Depending on the type and
device with the same controls used players may be compatible as well.
number of files, it may take some
for the in-dash disc player. To play a
Some USB flash memory device time before they begin to play.
USB flash memory device, connect it
(such as devices with security
to the USB adapter cable in the Depending on the software the
lockout features, etc.) will not work
upper glove box, then press the CD/ files were made with, it may not be
in this audio unit.
AUX button. The ignition switch possible to play some files, or
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or NOTE: display some text data.
ON (II) position. Do not use a device such as a card Voice Control System
The audio system reads and plays reader or hard drive as the device You can select the AUX mode by
the audio files on the USB flash or your files may be damaged. using the navigation system voice
memory device in MP3, WMA or control buttons, but cannot operate
Do not connect your USB flash the play mode functions.
AAC formats. Depending on the memory device using a HUB.
format, the display shows MP3, The specifications for compatible
WMA or AAC when a USB flash Do not use an extension cable to MP3 files are:
memory device is playing. The USB the USB adapter cable equipped
flash memory device limit is up to with your vehicle. Sampling frequency:
700 folders or up to 65535 files. 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
Do not keep the USB flash 16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
: Only AAC format files recorded memory device in the vehicle.
with iTunes are playable on this Direct sunlight and high heat will
audio unit. damage it.
178
Bit rate: Partition: In WMA or AAC format, DRM

32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/ Top partition only (digital rights management) files
160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps Maximum layers: 8 cannot be played. If the system finds
(MPEG1) a DRM file, the audio unit displays
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/ The specifications for compatible UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips
112/128/144/160/VBR kbps AAC files are: to the next file.
(MPEG2) Sampling frequency: Connecting a USB Flash Memory
Features
Supported standards: 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/ Device
MPEG1 Audio Layer3 44.1/48 kHz USB CONNECTOR
MPEG2 Audio LSF Layer3 Bit rate:
Partition: 8 320 kbps
Top partition only Supported standards:
Maximum layers: 8 MPEG4/AAC LC
MPEG2/AAC LC
WMA files are: Partition:
Sampling frequency: Top partition only
32/44.1/48 kHz Maximum layers: 8
USB ADAPTER CABLE
Bit rate: Even if recorded in MP3, WMA or
48 320/VBR kbps (Max 384) AAC format, a file with unsupported 1. Open the upper glove box, and pull
Supported standards: version cannot be played. If the out the USB adapter cable.
system finds it, the audio unit
WMA version 7/8/9
displays UNSUPPORTED, and then
skips to the next file.
CONTINUED
179
To Change or Select Files Using a Track List

Use the SKIP button while a USB
flash memory device is playing to
select passages and change files.
SKIP Each time you press the
SKIP button (Preset 6), the
system skips forward to the
beginning of the next file. Press the
SKIP button (Preset 5), to skip
backward to the beginning of the
USB CONNECTOR current file. Press it again to skip to
the beginning of the previous file.
2. Connect the USB flash memory TRACK LIST ICON
device to the USB connector FOLDER SELECTION To select
a different folder, press either side of You can also select a file directly
correctly and securely.
the TUNE FOLDER bar. Press the from a track list on the audio display.
When the USB flash memory device side to skip to the next folder, and Press the AUDIO button to show the
is connected and the USB mode is press the side to skip to the audio display, then touch the Track
selected on the audio system, the beginning of the previous folder. List icon. The track list menu
WMA or MP3 indicator is shown on appears on the display.
the navigation screen. It also shows
the folder and file numbers, and the
elapsed time on the screen.
180
FOLDER ICON TRACK REPEAT This feature FOLDER RANDOM This feature
continuously plays a file. To activate plays the files in the selected folder
the track repeat feature, press the in random order. To activate the
RPT button (Preset 1). You will see folder random feature, press and
TRACK REPEAT in the display. To hold the RDM button (Preset 2). You
turn it off, press the RPT button will see FOLDER RANDOM in the
(Preset 1). display. To turn it off, press and hold
the RDM button (Preset 2).
Features
FOLDER REPEAT This feature
replays all the files in the selected TRACK SCAN This feature
folder in the order they are stored. samples all files in the selected folder
RETURN ICON To activate the folder repeat feature, in the order they are stored. To
press and hold the RPT button activate the scan feature, press the
To scroll through the display, touch (Preset 1). You will see FOLDER SCAN button. You will see TRACK
the or icon on the side of the REPEAT in the display. To turn it SCAN in the display. You will also
screen. To go back to the previous off, press and hold the RPT button see the file number blinking. You will
display, touch the Return icon. (Preset 1). get a 10 second sampling of each file
To play a file, touch its icon on the in the folder. Press the SCAN button
TRACK RANDOM This feature
screen. The current folder is to get out of the scan mode. The
plays all the files in random order. To
highlighted in blue. system plays the last file sampled.
activate the track random feature,
To Select Repeat, Random or Scan press the RDM button (Preset 2).
Mode: You will see TRACK RANDOM in
You can select any type of repeat, the display. To turn it off, press the
random and scan modes by using the RDM button (Preset 2).
RPT button or RDM button, or SCAN
button.
CONTINUED
181
FOLDER SCAN This feature To Stop Playing a USB Flash Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory
samples the first file in each folder in Memory Device Device
the order they are stored. To activate To play the radio when a USB flash You can disconnect the USB flash
the folder scan feature, press and memory device is playing, press the memory device in any time even if
hold the SCAN button. You will see FM/AM button or touch the FM1, the USB mode is selected on the
FOLDER SCAN in the display. You FM2, or AM icon. If a disc is in the audio system. Always follow the USB
will also see the folder number audio unit, press the CD/AUX button flash memory device's instructions
blinking. You will get a 10 second or touch the CD icon to play the disc. when you remove it.
sampling of each first file in the If a PC card is in the audio unit, press When you disconnect the USB flash
folder(s). Press the SCAN button to the CD/AUX button or touch the memory device while it is playing,
get out of the scan mode. The system CARD icon to play a PC card. the navigation screen shows NO
plays the last file sampled. DATA.
Press the CD/AUX button again or
touch the AUX icon to switch back to If you reconnect the same USB flash
the USB flash memory device. memory device, the system will
begin playing where it left off.
USB Flash Memory Device Error
Messages
If you see an error message on the
screen, see page 183.
182
USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

screen while playing a USB flash Solution
Message
memory device, find the solution in
the chart to the right. If you cannot UNPLAYABLE The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flash memory
FILE device. There is a possibility that the files have been damaged.
clear the error message, take your UNSUPPORTED Appears when the unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.
vehicle to your dealer. NO SONG Information of music is nothing.
Features
183
FM/AM Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

The radio can receive the complete How well the radio receives stations
AM and FM bands. is dependent on many factors, such
Those bands cover these as the distance from the station's
frequencies: transmitter, nearby large objects, and
atmospheric conditions.
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz A radio station's signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
Radio stations on the AM band are
transmitter. If you are listening to an
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
AM station, you will notice the sound
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
volume becoming weaker, and the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
station drifting in and out. If you are
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). Driving very near the transmitter of a
listening to an FM station, you will
Stations must use these exact see the stereo indicator flickering off station that is broadcasting on a
frequencies. It is fairly common for and on as the signal weakens. frequency close to the frequency of
stations to round-off the frequency in Eventually, the stereo indicator will the station you are listening to can
their advertising, so your radio could go off and the sound will fade also affect your radio's reception. You
display a frequency of 100.9 even completely as you get out of range of may temporarily hear both stations,
though the announcer may identify the station's signal. or hear only the station you are close
the station as FM101. to.
184
FM/AM Radio Reception
Electrical interference from passing

vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's
Features
authority to operate the equipment.
Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by

band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as
such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and
radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to
signal from the station's transmitter, receive a distant radio station one
and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day
the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions.
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
185
Protecting Your Discs
General Information Protecting Discs

When using CD-R or CD-RW When a disc is not being played,
discs, use only high quality discs store it in its case to protect it from
labeled for audio use. dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
When recording a CD-R or
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
system. Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
Play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped discs may jam in the A new disc may be rough on the
drive or cause other problems. inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a disc by its edges; never
Handle your discs properly to
can flake off and fall on the recording touch either surface. Do not place
prevent damage and skipping.
surface of the disc, causing skipping stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
or other problems. Remove these These, along with contamination
pieces by rubbing the inner and from finger prints, liquids, and felt-tip
outer edges with the side of a pencil pens, can cause the disc to not play
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. or pen. properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit. Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc player.
186
Additional Information of 1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs

Recommended Discs
The in-dash disc player has a
sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
may become stuck inside and
damage the audio unit.
Features
Examples of these discs are shown to
the right: Bubbled/ With Label/ Using Printer Sealed With Plastic
Wrinkled Sticker Label Kit Ring
2. Damaged discs 3. Poor quality discs
Chipped/ Warped
Cracked Burrs
CONTINUED
187
4. Small, irregular shaped discs 5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.
Audio unit may not play the
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due following formats.
to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the
discs may cause the sound to skip.
Can Shape Arrow Shape
188
Remote Audio Controls
MODE BUTTON The VOL button adjusts the volume If you are playing a disc, iPod or USB
up ( ) or down ( ). Press the top or flash memory device, the system
bottom of the button and hold it until skips to the beginning of the next
the desired volume is reached, then track (file in MP3, WMA or AAC
release it. format) each time you press the top
() of the CH button. Press the
The MODE button changes the
bottom () to return to the
mode. Pressing the button
beginning of the current track/file.
Features
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
Press it twice to return to the
disc or a PC card (if a disc or a PC
previous track/file.
card is loaded), or an audio unit
CH BUTTON VOL BUTTON connected to the auxiliary input jack You will see the track/file number
or the USB adapter cable. and the elapsed time. If the disc has
On vehicles with navigation system text data or is compressed in MP3 or
Three controls for the audio system If you are listening to the radio, use
WMA, you can also see any other
are mounted in the steering wheel the CH button to change stations.
information (track title, file name,
hub. These let you control basic Each time you press the top () of
folder name, etc.).
functions without removing your the button, the system goes to the
hand from the wheel. next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
() to go back to the previous
station. If you press and hold the CH
button () or (), the system goes
into the seek mode. It finds a station
with a strong signal.
CONTINUED
189
Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack
In MP3 or WMA mode, you can use Auxiliary Input Jack

the skip function to select folders.
Press and hold the top () of the CH
button until you hear a beep, to skip
forward to the first file of the next
folder. Press the bottom () to skip
backward to the previous folder.
If you are playing a PC card, press
the top () of the CH button to
advance to the next file. Press the
bottom () to go back to the On vehicles without navigation system
previous file.
On vehicles with navigation system
Your vehicle has the auxiliary input
jack on the front panel. The system
will accept auxiliary input from
standard audio accessories.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the jack, press the CD/
AUX (On vehicles with navigation
system) or AUX (On vehicles without
navigation system) button to select it.
190
Radio Theft Protection
Your vehicle's audio system will If your vehicle's battery is

disable itself if it is disconnected disconnected or goes dead, or the
from electrical power for any reason. radio fuse is removed, the audio
To make it work again, you must system will disable itself. If this
enter a specific digit code using the happens, you will see ENTER
preset buttons. Because there are CODE in the frequency display the
hundreds of number combinations next time you turn on the system.
possible from specific digits, making Use the preset buttons to enter the
Features
the system work without knowing code. On vehicles with navigation
the exact code is nearly impossible. system, touch the Done icon to set
the code. The code is on the radio
You should have received a card that
code card included in your owner's
lists your audio system's code and
manual kit. When it is entered
serial numbers. It is best to store this
correctly, the radio will start playing.
card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio If you make a mistake entering the
system's serial number in this code, do not start over; complete the
owner's manual. sequence, then enter the correct
code. You have 10 tries to enter the
If you lose the card, you must obtain
correct code. If you are unsuccessful
the code number from a dealer. To
in 10 attempts, you must then leave
do this, you will need the system's
the system on for 1 hour before
serial number.
trying again.
191
Setting the Clock
On vehicles without navigation system 1 (H) BUTTON 3 (R) BUTTON

Press and hold the FM/AM
(CLOCK) button until the displayed
time begins to blink, then release the CLOCK
button. Change the hours by
pressing the 1 (H) button until the
numbers advance to the desired
time. Change the minutes by
pressing the 2 (M) button until the FM/AM (CLOCK)
numbers advance to the desired BUTTON
time.
Press the FM/AM (CLOCK) button
again to enter the set time.
2 (M) BUTTON
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is For example: On vehicles with navigation system
before the half hour, press the FM/ 1:06 will reset to 1:00 The navigation system receives
AM (CLOCK) button until you hear a 1:53 will reset to 2:00 signals from the global positioning
beep, then press the 3 (R) button to system (GPS), and the displayed
set the clock back to the previous time is updated automatically by the
hour. If the displayed time is after the GPS. Refer to the navigation system
half hour, the clock sets forward to manual for how to adjust the time.
the beginning of the next hour.
192
Security System
On Sport model The security system will not set if the

The security system helps to protect hood, tailgate, or any door is not fully
your vehicle and valuables from closed. If the system will not set,
theft. The horn sounds and a check the door and tailgate open
combination of headlights, parking/ indicator on the instrument panel
side marker lights and taillights (see page 62) to see if the doors and
flashes if someone attempts to break tailgate are fully closed. Since it is
into your vehicle or remove the audio not part of the monitor display,
Features
unit. This alarm continues for 2 manually check the hood.
minutes, then the system resets. To
NOTE: To see if the system is set
reset an activated system before the
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR after you exit the vehicle, press the
2 minutes have elapsed, unlock the
LOCK button on the remote
driver's door with the key or the Once the security system is set, transmitter within 5 seconds. If the
remote transmitter. opening any door, the tailgate, or the system is set, the horn will beep
The security system automatically hood without using the key or the once.
sets 15 seconds after you lock the remote transmitter, will cause the
alarm to activate. It also activates if Do not attempt to alter this system or
doors, hood, and the tailgate. For the
the audio unit is removed from the add other devices to it.
system to activate, you must lock the
doors and the tailgate from the dashboard or the wiring is cut.
outside with the key, driver's lock The alarm will also activate if a
tab, door lock master switch, or passenger inside the locked vehicle
remote transmitter. The security turns the ignition switch on.
system indicator on the instrument
panel starts blinking immediately to
show you the system is setting itself.
193
Cruise Control
On Sport model and Canadian LX model Using the Cruise Control 3. Press the SET/DECEL button on
Cruise control allows you to maintain the steering wheel. The CRUISE
CRUISE BUTTON RES/ACCEL
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) BUTTON CONTROL indicator on the
without keeping your foot on the instrument panel comes on to
accelerator pedal. It should be used show the system is now activated.
for cruising on straight, open
Cruise control may not hold the set
highways. It is not recommended for
speed when you are going up and
city driving, winding roads, slippery
down hills. If your speed increases
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down. This will cancel cruise
control. To resume the set speed,
SET/DECEL BUTTON CANCEL press the RES/ACCEL button. The
Improper use of the cruise BUTTON
indicator on the instrument panel will
control can lead to a crash. come back on.
1. Press the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE When climbing a steep hill, the
Use the cruise control only
MAIN indicator on the instrument automatic transmission may
when traveling on open
panel comes on. downshift to hold the set speed.
highways in good weather.
NOTE: The main switch can be left
on, even when the system is not in
use.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
194
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed You can decrease the set cruising Even with the cruise control turned
You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways: on, you can still use the accelerator
speed in any of these ways: Press and hold the SET/DECEL pedal to speed up for passing. After
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. Release the button when completing the pass, take your foot
button. When you reach the you reach the desired speed. off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
desired cruising speed, release the will return to the set cruising speed.

To slow down in very small
button. Resting your foot on the brake or
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
Features
To increase your speed in very button. Each time you do this, clutch pedal causes the cruise
small amounts, tap the RES/ your vehicle will slow down about control to cancel.
ACCEL button. Each time you do 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
this, the vehicle will speed up Tap the brake or clutch pedal
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
lightly with your foot. The CRUISE
Push on the accelerator pedal. CONTROL indicator on the
Accelerate to the desired cruising instrument panel goes out. When
speed, then press the SET/ the vehicle slows to the desired
DECEL button. speed, press the SET/DECEL
button.
CONTINUED
195
Cruise Control
Canceling Cruise Control Tapping either of the paddle shifters Resuming the Set Speed
shifts the gear up or down, but does When you push the CANCEL button,
CRUISE BUTTON
not cancel the cruise control. For or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
more information on driving with system will remember the previously
paddle shifters, see page 224. set cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h), and then press the RES/
ACCEL button. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator comes on. The
vehicle will accelerate to the same
cruising speed as before.
CANCEL BUTTON
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system off and erases the
You can cancel cruise control in any previous cruising speed.
of these ways:
Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Press the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Press the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.
196
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Break-in Period ........................... 198

vehicle, you should know what Fuel Recommendation ................ 198
gasoline to use and how to check the Service Station Procedures ......... 199
levels of important fluids. You also Refueling................................. 199
need to know how to properly store Opening and Closing the
luggage or packages. The Hood ................................... 200
information in this section will help Oil Check ................................ 201
you. If you plan to add any Engine Coolant Check ............ 202
accessories to your vehicle, please Fuel Economy ............................. 203
Before Driving
read the information in this section Accessories and
first. Modifications .......................... 206
Carrying Cargo ........................... 208
197
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation Some gasoline today is blended with

Help assure your vehicle's future Your vehicle is designed to operate oxygenates such as ethanol or
reliability and performance by paying on unleaded gasoline with a pump MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
extra attention to how you drive octane number of 87 or higher. Use of operate on oxygenated gasoline
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). a lower octane gasoline can cause a containing up to 10% ethanol by
During this period: persistent, heavy metallic rapping volume and up to 15% MTBE by
noise that can lead to engine damage. volume. Do not use gasoline
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid

We recommend using quality containing methanol.
acceleration.
gasolines containing detergent If you notice any undesirable
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 additives that help prevent fuel operating symptoms, try another
miles (300 km). system and engine deposits. service station or switch to another
Do not change the oil until the In addition, in order to maintain good brand of gasoline.
scheduled maintenance time. performance, fuel economy, and For further important fuel-related
You should also follow these emissions control, we strongly information for your vehicle, or
recommendations with an recommend, in areas where it is information on gasoline that does not
overhauled or exchanged engine, or available, the use of gasoline that contain MMT, visit Owner Link at
when the brakes are replaced. does NOT contain manganese-based owners.honda.com. In Canada, visit
fuel additives such as MMT.
www.honda. ca for additoin
Use of gasoline with these additives information on gasoine.
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact your
authorized dealer for service.
198
Service Station Procedures
Refueling HOLDER 4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel

1. Park with the driver's side closest nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
to the service station pump. not try to top off the tank. Leave
TETHER some room for the fuel to expand
FUEL FILL DOOR
Pull out with temperature changes.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
Push vehicle's fuel vapor recovery
Before Driving
system. The system helps keep
FUEL FILL CAP fuel vapor from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. pump. If this does not fix the
You may hear a hissing sound as problem, consult your dealer.
pressure inside the tank escapes.
Place the fuel fill cap in the holder
2. Outside of the vehicle, push on the
on the fuel fill door. To prevent the
right side edge of the fuel fill door
fuel fill cap from becoming lost, it
in the middle. The fuel fill door will
is attached to the fuel filler with a
pop up slightly. Pull it outward to
tether.
open it.
CONTINUED
199
Opening and Closing the Hood

LATCH
Gasoline is highly flammable HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame
away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
2. Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood near the center.
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on until 1. Park the vehicle, and set the
Slide your hand to the left until
it clicks at least once. If you do not parking brake. Pull the hood
you feel the hood latch handle.
properly tighten the cap, the release handle under the lower left
Push this handle up to release it.
malfunction indicator lamp may corner of the dashboard. The hood
Lift up the hood.
come on (see page 304). You will will pop up slightly.
also see a CHECK FUEL CAP If the hood latch handle moves
message on the information stiffly, or if you can open the hood
display. without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until lubricated.
it latches.
200
SUPPORT ROD Oil Check

DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
Before Driving
LOWER MARK
GRIP CLIP
3. Holding the grip, pull the support 4. Remove the dipstick again, and
rod out of its clip. Insert the end check the level. It should be
Wait a few minutes after turning the
into the designated hole in the between the upper and lower
engine off before you check the oil.
hood. marks.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to If it is near or below the lower mark,
remove the support rod from the 2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean see Adding Engine Oil on page 253.
hole. Put the support rod back into cloth or paper towel.
its holding clip. Lower the hood to 3. Insert the dipstick all the way back
about a foot (30 cm) above the into its hole.
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
201
Engine Coolant Check Refer to Owner's Maintenance

Checks on page 250 for information
RESERVE TANK about checking other items on your
vehicle.
MAX
MIN
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 256 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
202
Fuel Economy
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel

Economy Estimates Comparison.
Fuel economy is not a fixed number. City MPG Highway MPG
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments.
Combined Fuel Estimated Annual
Before Driving
The EPA fuel economy estimates Economy Fuel Cost
shown in the example to the right are (Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
a useful tool for comparison when
buying a vehicle. EPA estimates Combined Fuel Economy Estimated Annual Fuel Cost
include: Represents a combination of city and Provides an estimated annual fuel
City MPG Represents urban highway driving. The scale cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
driving in a vehicle in light traffic. A represents the range of combined km) per year multiplied by the cost
range of miles per gallon achieved is fuel economy for other vehicles in per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost
also provided. the class. data) divided by the combined fuel
economy.
Highway MPG Represents a
mixture of rural and interstate For more information on fuel
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle, economy ratings and factors that
typical of longer trips in free-flowing affect fuel economy, visit www.
traffic. A range of miles per gallon fueleconomy.gov (Canada: Visit www.
achieved is also provided. vehicles.gc.ca)
CONTINUED
203
Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy Factors Improving Fuel Economy Keep your vehicle clean In
The following factors can lower your Vehicle Maintenance particular, a build-up of snow or
vehicle's fuel economy: A properly maintained vehicle mud on your vehicle's underside
Aggressive driving (hard maximizes fuel economy. Poor adds weight and rolling resistance.
maintenance can significantly reduce Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
acceleration and braking)
fuel economy. Always maintain your economy.
Excessive idling, accelerating and vehicle according to the maintenance Drive Efficiently
braking in stop-and-go traffic messages displayed on the Drive moderately Rapid
Cold engine operation (engines information display (see Owner's acceleration, abrupt cornering, and
are more efficient when warmed Maintenance Checks on page 250). hard braking increase fuel
up) For example: consumption.
Driving with a heavy load or the air Use the recommended viscosity Observe the speed limit
conditioner running motor oil, displaying the API Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
Certification Seal (see page on fuel mileage at speeds above 45
Improperly inflated tires 253). mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
Maintain proper tire inflation speed and you reduce the drag.
An under-inflated tire increases Trailers, car top carriers, roof
rolling resistance, which reduces racks and bike racks are also big
fuel economy. contributors to increased drag.
Avoid carrying excess weight in
Always drive in the highest gear
your vehicle It puts a heavier possible If your vehicle has a
load on the engine, increasing fuel manual transmission, you can
consumption. boost your fuel economy by up
shifting as early as possible.
204
Fuel Economy
Avoid excessive idling Idling Checking Your Fuel Economy

results in 0 miles per gallon.
Minimize the use of the air
conditioning system The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use Miles Gallons Miles per
driven of fuel Gallon
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible.
Plan and combine trips
Before Driving
L per
Combine several short trips into 100 Liter Kilometers 100 km
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Direct calculation is the 1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
recommended source of information 2) Reset trip counter to zero.
about your actual fuel economy.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking 3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
fuel gauge readings are NOT 4) Follow one of the simple calculations above.
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles.
205
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing Before installing any accessory:

some non-Honda accessories, can Make sure the accessory does not
make it unsafe. Before you make any Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your obscure any lights, or interfere

modifications or add any accessories, with proper vehicle operation or
be sure to read the following vehicle's handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a performance.
information.
crash in which you can be hurt
Be sure electronic accessories do
Accessories or killed. not overload electrical circuits (see
Your dealer has Honda accessories
page 307) or interfere with proper
that allow you to personalize your Follow all instructions in this operation of your vehicle.
vehicle. These accessories have been owner's manual regarding
designed and approved for your accessories and modifications. Before installing any electronic
vehicle, and are covered by warranty. accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
Although non-Honda accessories When properly installed, cellular If possible, have your dealer
may fit on your vehicle, they may not phones, alarms, two-way radios, and inspect the final installation.
meet factory specifications, and could low-powered audio systems should
adversely affect your vehicle's not interfere with your vehicle's Do not install accessories on the
handling and stability. computer controlled systems, such side pillars or across the rear
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and windows. Accessories installed in
tire pressure monitoring system (if these areas may interfere with
equipped). proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
206
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle Non-Honda wheels, because they

Removing parts from your vehicle, or are a universal design, can cause
replacing components with non- excessive stress on suspension
Honda components could seriously components and will not be
affect your vehicle's handling, compatible with the tire pressure
stability, and reliability. monitoring system (TPMS).
Here are some examples: : If equipped
Lowering your vehicle with a non-

Larger or smaller wheels and tires
Honda suspension kit that can interfere with the operation of
Before Driving
significantly reduces ground your vehicle's anti-lock brakes and
clearance can allow the other systems.
undercarriage to hit speed bumps Modifying your steering wheel or
or other raised objects, which
any other part of your vehicle's
could cause the airbags to deploy.
safety features can make the
Raising your vehicle with a non- systems ineffective.
Honda suspension kit can affect
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
the handling and stability.
consult your dealer.
207
Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient

storage areas:
CARGO AREA Upper glove box
REAR SIDE POCKET FRONT DOOR POCKETS UPPER GLOVE BOX
Lower glove box
(RIGHT SIDE) Front door pockets
Seat-back pocket (if equipped)

Center pocket
Cargo area side pocket
Cargo area, including the rear
seats when folded up or down.
Seat under box
Cargo floor box (all canadian
models with automatic
transmission)
However, carrying too much cargo,
CARGO FLOOR BOX*2 SEAT UNDER BOX CENTER POCKET or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle's handling, stability,
stopping distance, tires, and make it
SEAT-BACK POCKET*1 LOWER GLOVE BOX
unsafe. Before carrying any type of
1: If equipped cargo, be sure to read the following
2: All Canadian models with automatic transmission pages.
208
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits (Payload) Label Example Steps for Determining Correct Load
The maximum load for your vehicle Limit
is 850 lbs (385 kg). 1. Locate the statement The
See Tire And Loading Information combined weight of occupants and
label attached to the driver's cargo should never exceed XXX kg
doorjamb. or XXX lbs. on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
Before Driving
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, and be riding in your vehicle.
accessories, and the tongue load if 3. Subtract the combined weight of
you are towing a trailer. the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other

loading guidelines in this
manual.
CONTINUED
209
Carrying Cargo
4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For Example 1
example, if the XXX amount Max Load (850 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be (150 lbs x 2 300 lbs) (550 lbs)
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs. Example 2
(1,400 750 (5 150) 650 Max Load (850 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight
lbs.) (150 lbs x 4 600 lbs) (250 lbs)
5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not Example 3
safely exceed the available cargo Max Load (850 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight
and luggage load capacity (150 lbs x 5 750 lbs) (100 lbs)
calculated in Step 4.
In addition, the total weight of the
6. If your vehicle will be towing a vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
trailer, load from your trailer will cargo, and trailer tongue load must
be transferred to your vehicle. not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Consult this manual to determine Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
how this reduces the available Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on
cargo and luggage load capacity of a label on the driver's doorjamb.
your vehicle.
210
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Cargo in the Passenger If you fold the rear seats up or Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
Compartment down, tie down items that could be Distribute cargo evenly on the
Store or secure all items that could thrown about the vehicle during a floor of the cargo area, placing the
be thrown around and hurt crash or sudden stop. Also, keep heaviest items on the bottom and
someone during a crash. all cargo below the bottom of the as far forward as possible. Tie
windows. If it is higher, it could down items that could be thrown
Be sure items placed on the floor
interfere with the proper operation about the vehicle during a crash or
behind the front seats cannot roll
of the side curtain airbags. sudden stop.
under the seats and interfere with
the driver's ability to operate the Do not stack items higher than the
Before Driving
pedals, the proper operation of the back of the rear seats. They can
seats, or proper operation of the block your view and be thrown
sensors under the seats. around the vehicle during a crash.
Keep the upper and lower glove If you carry large items that
boxes closed while driving. If it is prevent you from closing the
open, a passenger could injure tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
their knees during a crash or passenger area. To avoid the
sudden stop. possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page 53.
CONTINUED
211
Carrying Cargo
Cargo Hooks
HOOK
: If equipped HOOK Your vehicle also has cargo hooks on

side panel in the cargo area.
The two or four hooks on the floor
They are designed to hold light
can be used to install a net for
items. Heavy objects may damage
securing items.
the hook. Make sure any items put
on each hook weigh less than 2.2 lbs
(1 kg).
212
Driving
This section gives you tips on Driving Guidelines ...................... 214

starting the engine under various Preparing to Drive ...................... 215
conditions, and how to operate the Starting the Engine ..................... 216
manual and automatic transmissions. Manual Transmission ................. 217
It also includes important information Automatic Transmission ............. 219
on parking your vehicle, the braking Driving with the Paddle Shifters
system, the vehicle stability assist (Sport only) ............................. 224
(VSA), and the tire pressure Parking ....................................... 229
monitoring system (TPMS). Braking System .......................... 230
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ............... 231
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA),
Driving
aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System ..................... 233
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ................................... 235
Towing a Trailer.......................... 238
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a
Motorhome ............................. 238
213
Driving Guidelines
On Sport model
Your vehicle is designed to give you
optimum handling and performance
on well-maintained roads. As part of
this design, your vehicle has
minimum ground clearance.
Use caution if you ever drive your

vehicle on very rough or rutted
roads. You could damage the
suspension and underbody by
bottoming out. Going too fast over
parking lot speed bumps can
also cause damage.

Curbs and steep inclines could
damage the front and rear
bumpers. Low curbs that do not
affect the average vehicle may be
high enough to hit the bumper on
your vehicle. The front or rear
bumper may scrape when trying to
drive onto an incline, such as a
steep driveway or trailer ramps.
214
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks 5. Check the seat adjustment (see
and adjustments before you drive page 93).
your vehicle.
6. Check the adjustment of the inside
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, and outside mirrors (see page
and outside lights are clean and 101).
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
7. Check the steering wheel
or ice.
adjustment (see page 77).
2. Check that the hood is fully
8. Make sure the doors and the
closed.
tailgate are securely closed and
3. Visually check the tires. If a tire locked.
Driving
looks low, use a gauge to check its
9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
pressure (see page 273).
your passengers have fastened
4. Check that any items you may be their seat belts (see page 14).
carrying are stored properly or
10. When you start the engine, check
fastened down securely.
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see page 59).
215
Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake. 4. Without touching the accelerator 6. If the engine fails to start, press
pedal, turn the ignition key to the the accelerator pedal all the way
2. In cold weather, turn off all
START (III) position. Do not hold down, and hold it there while
electrical accessories to reduce the
the key in the START (III) position starting to clear flooding. If the
drain on the battery.
for more than 15 seconds at a time. engine still does not start, return to
3. Manual transmission: If the engine does not start right step 5.
Press the clutch pedal down all the away, pause for at least 10 seconds
way. The START (III) position before trying again.
does not function unless the clutch
pedal is pressed. The engine is harder to start in cold
Automatic transmission: weather. Also, the thinner air found at
Make sure the shift lever is in The immobilizer system protects your altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
Park. Press on the brake pedal. vehicle from theft. If an improperly- meters) adds to this problem.
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine's fuel system is disabled. For
more information, see page 79.
5. If the engine does not start within

15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
216
Manual Transmission
Come to a full stop before you shift

into reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into Rapid slowing or speeding up
reverse with the vehicle moving. can cause loss of control on
Push down the clutch pedal, and slippery surfaces. If you crash,
pause for a few seconds before you can be injured.
shifting into reverse, or shift into one Use extra care when driving on
of the forward gears for a moment. slippery surfaces.
This stops the gears so they won't
grind.
When slowing down, you can get
Driving
extra braking from the engine by
The manual transmission is shifting to a lower gear. This extra
synchronized in all forward gears for braking can help you maintain a safe
smooth operation. It has a lockout so speed and prevent your brakes from
you cannot shift directly from fifth to overheating while going down a
reverse. When shifting up or down, steep hill. Before downshifting, make
make sure you push the clutch pedal sure the engine speed will not go
down all the way, shift to the next into the tachometer's red zone in the
gear, and let the pedal up gradually. lower gear.
When you are not shifting, do not
rest your foot on the clutch pedal.
This can cause the clutch to wear out
faster.
CONTINUED
217
Manual Transmission
Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter

Drive in the highest gear that lets the If you exceed the maximum speed
engine run and accelerate smoothly. for the gear you are in, the engine
This will give you good fuel economy speed will enter into the
and effective emissions control. The tachometer's red zone. If this occurs,
following shift points are you may feel the engine cut in and
recommended: out. This is caused by a limiter in the
engine's computer controls. The
Shift up Normal acceleration engine will run normally when you
reduce the rpm below the red zone.
1st to 2nd 15 mph (24 km/h) The engine speed limiter only works
2nd to 3rd 27 mph (44 km/h) when you upshift; engine speed is
3rd to 4th 39 mph (63 km/h) not limited during downshifts. Before
4th to 5th 53 mph (85 km/h) downshifting, make sure the engine
will not go into the tachometer's red
zone.
218
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

SHIFT LEVER
All models except U.S. Sport RELEASE
Driving
BUTTON
U.S. Sport model If the malfunction indicator lamp U.S. Sport model is shown
comes on along with the D
These indicators on the instrument To shift from Park to any position,
indicator, there is a problem with the
panel show which position the shift press firmly on the brake pedal and
automatic transmission control
lever is in. press the release button on the front
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
of the shift lever, then pull the lever.
The D indicator comes on for a few have the transmission checked by
You cannot shift out of Park when
seconds when you turn the ignition your dealer as soon as possible.
the ignition switch is in the LOCK
switch to the ON (II) position. If it
(0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position.
flashes while driving (in any shift
position), it indicates a possible
problem in the transmission.
CONTINUED
219
All models except U.S. Sport U.S. Sport model Park (P) This position
To shift from: Do this: To shift from: Do this: mechanically locks the transmission.
Press the brake pedal, and Press the brake pedal, and Use Park whenever you are turning
P to R press the shift lever release P to R press the shift lever release off or starting the engine. To shift out
button. button.
R to P R to P of Park, you must press on the brake
Press the shift lever release pedal and have your foot off the
N to R Press the shift lever release N to R
button.
D3 to 2 button. D to S accelerator pedal. Press the release
2 to 1 S to D
D to N
button on the front of the shift lever
1 to 2 Move the shift lever.
2 to D3 N to D to move it.
D3 to D R to N
D to N Move the shift lever. If you have done all of the above and
D to D3 still cannot move the lever out of
N to D Park, see Shift Lock Release on
R to N
page 223.
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. You must also press the
release button to shift into Park. The
shift lever must be in Park before
you can remove the key from the
ignition switch.
220
Reverse (R) Press the brake Drive (D) Use this position for All models except U.S. Sport
pedal and press the release button on your normal driving. The Second (2) To shift to second,
the front of the shift lever to shift transmission automatically selects a press the release button on the front
from Park to reverse. To shift from suitable gear (1 through 5) for your of the shift lever. This position locks
reverse to neutral, come to a speed and acceleration. You may the transmission in second gear. It
complete stop, and then shift. Press notice the transmission shifting up at does not downshift to first gear when
the release button before shifting higher engine speeds when the you come to a stop.
into reverse from neutral. engine is cold. This helps the engine
Use second gear:
Neutral (N) Use neutral if you warm up faster.
For more power when climbing.
need to restart a stalled engine, or if All models except U.S. Sport
it is necessary to stop briefly with the Drive (D3) This position is similar To increase engine braking when
Driving
engine idling. Shift to the Park to D, except only the first three gears going down steep hills.
position if you need to leave your are selected. Use D3 to provide For starting out on a slippery
vehicle for any reason. Press on the engine braking when going down a
surface or in deep snow.
brake pedal when you are moving steep hill. D3 can also keep the
the shift lever from neutral to transmission from cycling between To help reduce wheel spin.
another gear. third and fourth gears in stop-and-go
driving.
CONTINUED
221
All models except U.S. Sport U.S. Sport model Engine Speed Limiter
First (1) To shift from second to S position (S) To shift into the S If you exceed the maximum speed
first, press the release button on the position, press the release button on for the gear you are in, the engine
front of the shift lever. This position the front of the shift lever, and move speed will enter into the
locks the transmission in first gear. the lever to S. This position is similar tachometer's red zone. If this occurs,
By upshifting and downshifting to D, except only first to fourth gears you may feel the engine cut in and
through 1, 2, D3, and D, you can are selected and fifth gear is no out. This is caused by a limiter in the
operate the transmission much like a longer available. However, during engine's computer controls. The
manual transmission without a clutch most driving conditions, only first engine will run normally when you
pedal. through third gears are used. reduce the rpm below the red zone.
With the shift lever in D or S, you
can also use the paddle shifters to
shift the transmission up or down.
With the paddle shifters, you can
operate the transmission much like a
manual transmission without a clutch
pedal. For more information on
driving with the paddle shifters, see
page 224.
222
Shift Lock Release COVER RELEASE BUTTON

This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release button
does not work.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch. NOTCH
3. Put a cloth on the notch of the shift SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
Driving
lock release slot cover to prevent
scratches. Using a small flat-tip 4. Insert the key in the shift lock 6. Remove the key from the shift lock
screwdriver or a metal fingernail release slot. release slot, then reinstall the
file, carefully pry on the notch of cover. Make sure the notch on the
5. Push down on the key while you
the cover to remove it. cover is on the left side. Insert the
press the release button on the
key back into the igniton switch,
shift lever and move the shift lever
press the brake pedal, and restart
out of Park to neutral.
the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
223
Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Sport only)
Using the Paddle Shifters in D

position (D-Paddle Shift Mode)
U.S. models only
When you are driving in D position,
you can shift the transmission up or
down manually with the paddle
shifters.
GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

To shift up or down, use the Each time you pull the (right)
(right) or (left) paddle shifter on paddle, the transmission shifts to a
each side of the steering wheel. higher gear. Pull the (left) paddle
to downshift. You will see the
selected gear number on the
instrument panel.
When you pull either paddle shifter,
the gear position indicator shows you
the selected gear number.
When the transmission returns to
drive mode (D), the displayed gear
number disappears.
224
Downshifting with the paddle shifter The transmission remains in the You upshift before the engine
allows you to increase the engine selected gear if you do not speed reaches the lowest
braking when going down steep or accelerate. threshold of the higher gear.
long hills, and provides more power
Each time you pull either paddle You pull both paddle shifters at the
when climbing uphills. You can
shifter, the transmission shifts one same time.
upshift the transmission manually to
gear up or down. If you want to shift
reduce the rpm. Driving in the The transmission downshifts to first
up or down more than two gears, pull
higher gear helps fuel economy. gear and returns to drive mode (D)
the paddle shifter twice, pause, and
when the vehicle comes to a
The transmission control system then pull it again.
complete stop or the vehicle speed is
monitors the accelerator pedal use
The automatic transmission will not about 6 mph (10 km/h).
and your driving conditions. When
allow you to shift up or down if:
Driving
you press the accelerator pedal as in
normal driving, the system judges You downshift before the engine
that you are driving at a constant speed reaches the highest
cruising speed without using the threshold of the lower gear.
paddle shifters. Under these If you try to do this, the gear position
conditions, D-paddle shift mode is indicator will flash the number of the
canceled, and the transmission lower gear several times, then return
automatically returns to drive mode to a higher gear.
(D).
CONTINUED
225
When you pull and hold the Using the Paddle Shift in S GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
(right) paddle shifter, the position (Sequential Shift Mode)
transmission automatically returns to U.S. models only
drive mode (D). With the shift lever in the S position,
you can manually shift up or down
If there is a problem in the
with the paddle shifters. The
transmission while you are driving
transmission goes into the sequential
with the paddle shifters, the D
shift mode and holds the selected
indicator flashes, the D-paddle shift
gear.
mode is canceled, and the
transmission returns to drive mode To enter the sequential shift mode,
(D). press the release button on the front M INDICATOR
of the shift lever, move the lever to
the S position, then pull either paddle When you move the shift lever from
shifter. To return to drive mode (D), D to the S position and pull either
move the shift lever to the D paddle shifter, the gear position
position. While you are driving in the indicator displays M along with the
sequential shift mode, the selected gear number.
transmission will not automatically To upshift, pull the (right) paddle
return to drive mode (D). shifter. To downshift, pull the
(left) paddle shifter.
226
When you accelerate from a stop, the Downshifting with the paddle shifter The automatic transmission will not
transmission starts in first gear, and allows you to increase the engine allow you to shift up or down if:
you must manually upshift between braking when going down steep or You downshift before the engine
first and fifth gears. Make sure you long hills, and provides more power
speed reaches the highest
upshift before the engine speed when climbing uphills. You can
threshold of the lower gear.
reaches the tachometer's red zone. upshift the transmission manually to
reduce the rpm. Driving in the If you try to do this, the gear position
The transmission remains in the
higher gear helps fuel economy. indicator will flash the number of the
selected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). There
lower gear several times, then return
is no automatic downshift when you The transmission also shifts
to a higher gear.
push the accelerator pedal to the automatically as the vehicle comes to
floor. a complete stop. It downshifts to first
Driving
gear when the vehicle speed reaches
When you are driving in 4th or 5th
6 mph (10 km/h) or less.
gear, the transmission downshifts to
the lower gear under the following
conditions:
The vehicle slows down to a
certain speed.
You press the brake pedal.
CONTINUED
227
If the vehicle speed decreases below Starting in Second Gear Recommended Shift Points
the redline of the selected lower gear When you are in sequential shift
mode, and the vehicle is stopped, Drive in the highest gear that lets the
while the indicator is flashing, the engine run and accelerate smoothly.
transmission downshifts, and the pull the (right) paddle shifter to
shift to second gear. You will see This will give you good fuel economy
indicator displays the selected gear.
M2 in the display. Starting in and effective emissions control. The
You upshift before the engine second gear helps to reduce following shift points are
speed reaches the lowest wheelspin in deep snow or on a recommended:
threshold of the higher gear. slippery surface. Shift up Normal acceleration
You pull both paddle shifters at the 1st to 2nd 15 mph (24 km/h)
same time. 2nd to 3rd 25 mph (40 km/h)
3rd to 4th 40 mph (64 km/h)
4th to 5th 47 mph (76 km/h )
228
Parking
Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
you park your vehicle. Make sure the Make sure the windows are the front wheels away from the
parking brake is set firmly, or your closed. curb. If your vehicle has a manual
vehicle may roll if it is parked on an transmission, put it in first gear
Turn off the lights.
incline. and set the parking brake.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.
If your vehicle has an automatic If the vehicle is facing downhill,
in the cargo area or take them with
transmission, set the parking brake turn the front wheels toward the
you.
before you put the transmission in curb. If your vehicle has a manual
Park. This keeps the vehicle from Lock the doors and the tailgate. transmission, put it in reverse gear
moving and putting pressure on the and set the parking brake.
On Sport model
parking mechanism in the
Check the indicator on the Make sure the parking brake is
Driving

transmission.
instrument panel to verify that the fully released before driving away.
security system is set. Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
Never park over dry leaves, tall
damage the rear brakes.
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
229
Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with front Check your brakes after driving Brake Pad Wear Indicators
disc brakes. The brakes on the rear through deep water. Apply the If the front brake pads need
wheels are drum. A power assist brakes moderately to see if they feel replacing, you will hear a distinctive,
helps reduce the effort needed on the normal. If not, apply them gently and metallic screeching sound when you
brake pedal. The anti-lock brake frequently until they do. Be extra apply the brake pedal. If you do not
system (ABS) helps you retain cautious and alert in your driving. have the brake pads replaced, they
steering control when braking very will screech all the time. It is normal
Braking System Design
hard. for the brakes to occasionally squeal
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits. or squeak when you apply them.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up Each circuit works diagonally across
heat, and reduces their effectiveness the vehicle (the left-front brake is
and reduces brake pad life. In connected with the right-rear brake,
addition, fuel economy can be etc.). If one circuit should develop a
reduced. It also keeps your brake problem, you will still have braking
lights on all the time, confusing at two wheels.
drivers behind you.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their
effectiveness. Use the engine to
assist the brakes by taking your foot
off the accelerator and downshifting
to a lower gear.
230
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) You will feel a pulsation in the brake ABS Indicator
helps prevent the wheels from pedal when the ABS activates, and
locking up, and helps you retain you may hear some noise. This is If the ABS indicator comes on, the
steering control by pumping the normal: it is the ABS rapidly anti-lock function of the braking
brakes rapidly, much faster than a pumping the brakes. On dry system has shut down. The brakes
person can do it. pavement, you will need to press on still work like a conventional system,
the brake pedal very hard before the but without anti-lock. You should
The electronic brake distribution
ABS activates. However, you may have your dealer inspect your vehicle
(EBD) system, which is part of the
feel the ABS activate immediately if as soon as possible.
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
braking distribution according to If the ABS indicator comes on while
vehicle loading. driving, test the brakes as shown on
Driving
You should never pump the brake pedal. page 305.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as stomp and steer.
CONTINUED
231
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
If the ABS indicator and the brake Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a
system indicator come on together, longer distance to stop on loose or
and the parking brake is fully ABS does not reduce the time or uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
released, the EBD system may also distance it takes to stop the snow, than a vehicle without anti-
be shut down. vehicle. It only helps with the lock.
steering control during braking.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page 305. If the brakes feel normal, ABS will not prevent a skid that
drive slowly and have your vehicle results from changing direction
repaired by your dealer as soon as abruptly, such as trying to take a
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking corner too fast or making a sudden
which could cause the rear wheels to lane change. Always drive at a safe
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of speed for the road and weather
control. conditions.
On vehicles with VSA system ABS cannot prevent a loss of
The VSA indicator will come on stability. Always steer moderately
along with the ABS indicator. when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
232
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
If equipped VSA Off Indicator If the indicator does not come on

The vehicle stability assist (VSA) when the ignition switch is turned to
system helps to stabilize the vehicle When VSA is off, the VSA off the ON (II) position, there may be a
during cornering if the vehicle turns indicator comes on as a reminder. problem with the VSA system. Have
more or less than desired. It also your dealer inspect your vehicle as
assists you in maintaining traction Vehicle Stability Assist soon as possible.
while accelerating on loose or (VSA) System Indicator If the low tire pressure indicator or
slippery road surfaces. It does this by
When VSA activates, you will see the TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
regulating the engine's output and by
VSA system indicator blink. system automatically turns on even if
selectively applying the brakes.
the VSA system is turned off by
When VSA activates, you may notice If this indicator comes on while pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
driving, pull to the side of the road
Driving
that the engine does not respond to page 234). If this happens, you
the accelerator in the same way it when it is safe, and turn off the cannot turn the VSA system off by
does at other times. There may also engine. Reset the system by pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
be some noise from the VSA restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on or comes Without VSA, your vehicle will have
hydraulic system. You will also see
back on while driving, have the VSA normal braking and cornering ability,
the VSA system indicator blink.
system inspected by your dealer. but it will not have VSA traction and
The VSA system cannot enhance the stability enhancement.
vehicle's driving stability in all NOTE: The main function of the VSA
situations and does not control your system is generally known as
vehicle's entire braking system. It is Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
still your responsibility to drive and The system also includes a traction
corner at reasonable speeds and to control function.
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
CONTINUED
233
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA OFF Switch VSA is turned on every time you start VSA and Tire Sizes
the engine, even if you turned it off Driving with varying tire or wheel
VSA OFF SWITCH
the last time you drove the vehicle. sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
In certain unusual conditions when
make sure they are the same size
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
and type as your original tires (see
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
page 277).
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system If you install winter tires, make sure
is off, the traction control system is they are the same size as those that
also off. You should only attempt to were originally supplied with your
free your vehicle with the VSA off if vehicle. Exercise the same caution
you are not able to free it when the during winter driving as you would if
VSA is on. your vehicle was not equipped with
This switch is under the driver's side VSA.
Immediately after freeing your
beverage holder. To turn the VSA vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
system on and off, press and hold it again. We do not recommend driving
until you hear a beep. your vehicle with the VSA and
When VSA is off, the VSA off traction control systems switched off.
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Press and hold the switch again. It
turns the system back on.
234
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
U.S. models only Low Tire Pressure If you cannot make the low tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire Indicator pressure indicator go out after
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) When the low tire pressure indicator inflating the tires to the specified
that turns on every time you start the is on, one or more of your tires is values, have your dealer check the
engine and monitors the pressure in significantly underinflated. You system as soon as possible.
your tires while driving. should stop and check your tires as Driving on a significantly under-
Each tire has its own pressure sensor soon as possible, and inflate them to inflated tire causes the tire to
(not including the spare tire). If the the proper pressure as indicated on overheat and can lead to tire failure.
air pressure of a tire becomes the vehicle's tire information placard. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
significantly low, the sensor in that If you think you can safely drive a efficiency and tire tread life, and may
tire immediately sends a signal that short distance to a service station, affect the vehicle's handling and
Driving
causes the low tire pressure indicator proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to stopping ability.
to come on. the recommended pressure shown Because tire pressure varies by
on the driver's doorjamb. temperature and other conditions,
If the tire is flat, or if the tire pressure the low tire pressure indicator may
is too low to continue driving, replace come on unexpectedly.
the tire with the compact spare tire
(see page 284).
CONTINUED
235
For example, if you check and fill Each tire, including the spare, should When you restart the vehicle with
your tires in a warm area, then drive be checked monthly when cold, and the compact spare tire, the TPMS
in extremely cold weather, the tire set to the recommended inflation indicator may also come on and stay
pressure will be lower than pressure as specified on the tire on after driving several miles
measured and could be underinflated information label and in the owner's (kilometers).
and cause the low tire pressure manual (see page 274).
indicator to come on. Or, if you
check and adjust your tire pressure Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
in cooler conditions, and drive into
extremely hot conditions, the tire This indicator comes on and stays on
may become overinflated. However, if there is a problem with the tire
the low tire pressure indicator will pressure monitoring system.
not come on if the tires are If this happens, the system will shut
overinflated. off and no longer monitor tire
Refer to page 273 for tire inflation pressures. Have the system checked
guidelines. by your dealer as soon as possible.
Although your tire pressure is If the low tire pressure indicator or
monitored, you must manually check TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
the tire pressures monthly. system automatically turns on even
if the VSA system is turned off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
page 234). If this happens, you cannot
turn the VSA system off by pressing
the VSA off switch again.
: If equipped
236
Changing a Tire with TPMS The low tire pressure indicator or the As required by the FCC: This device
If you have a flat tire, the low tire TPMS indicator will go off, after complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
pressure indicator will come on. several miles (kilometers) driving, Operation is subject to the following two
Replace the flat tire with the compact when you replace the spare tire with conditions: (1) This device may not
spare tire (see page 284). the specified regular tire equipped cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference
with the tire pressure monitor received, including interference that may
Each wheel (except the compact
sensor. cause undesired operation.
spare tire wheel) is equipped with a
tire pressure sensor mounted inside Never use a puncture-repairing agent Changes or modifications not expressly
the tire behind the valve stem. You in a flat tire. If used, you will have to approved by the party responsible for
must use TPMS specific wheels. It is replace the tire pressure sensor. compliance could void the user's
recommended that you always have Have the flat tire repaired by your authority to operate the equipment.
Driving
your tires serviced by your dealer or dealer as soon as possible.
qualified technician. This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is
After you replace the flat tire with the subject to the following two conditions:
compact spare tire, the low tire (1) this device may not cause
pressure indicator stays on. This is interference, and (2) this device must
normal; the system is not monitoring accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
the spare tire pressure. Manually
check the spare tire pressure to be
sure it is correct. After several miles
(kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low tire
pressure indicator goes off.
237
Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Towing a Trailer Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Automatic transmission:

Your vehicle is not designed to tow a Motorhome Perform the following procedure
trailer. Attempting to do so can void Your vehicle can be towed behind a every day immediately before you
your warranties. motorhome at legal highway speeds begin towing. Otherwise severe
up to 65 mph (100 km/h). Do not automatic transmission damage will
exceed 65 mph (100 km/h). occur.
Otherwise, severe transmission
1. Check the transmission fluid level
damage will occur.
(see page 259). Do not overfill.
When purchasing a tow bar, make 2. Start the engine.
sure you select a reputable
manufacturer and installer. Follow 3. Press on the brake pedal. Move
the manufacturer's attachment the shift lever through all its
instructions carefully. positions.
4. Shift to the D position and hold for
5 seconds, then to N. Let the
engine run for 3 minutes, then turn
The steering system can be damaged if it off.
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns freely before you begin
Severe transmission damage will occur
towing.
if the vehicle is shifted from reverse to
neutral and then towed with the drive
wheels on the ground.
238
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
5. Release the parking brake. Extended Towing

If you tow more than 8 hours in one
Manual transmission: day, you should repeat the above Failure to follow the recommended
1. Move the shift lever into the procedure at least every 8 hours instructions exactly will result in severe
Neutral position. (when you stop for fuel, etc.). automatic transmission damage. If you
cannot shift the transmission or start
2. Release the parking brake. the engine, your vehicle must be
Leave the ignition switch in the transported on a flat-bed truck or
ACCESSORY (I) position so the trailer.
steering wheel does not lock. Make
sure the radio and any items plugged
into the accessory power sockets are
Driving
turned off so you do not run down
the battery.
When you stop towing your vehicle
and shift out of the neutral position,
you may not be able to move the shift
lever from neutral to reverse or Park.
If this happens, press the brake pedal
and turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position, then shift out of
neutral.
CONTINUED
239
When towing your vehicle for long Only remove the fuse after you have
periods, remove the 30A Radio fuse performed the transmission shifting
to reduce drain on battery. This fuse procedure, and the key is in the
is located in the interior fuse box and ACCESSORY (I) position. Store the
shown as number 61 below. fuse in an obvious location (center
pocket, etc) as a reminder to re-
install the fuse before driving the
vehicle.
RADIO FUSE
240
Automatic transmission
If you tow a Fit behind a motorhome,
the transmission fluid must be
changed every 2 years or 30,000
miles (48,000 km), whichever comes
first.
Driving
241
242
Maintenance
This section explains why it is Maintenance Safety ..................... 244

important to keep your vehicle well Maintenance Minder .................. 245
maintained and how to follow basic Fluid Locations ........................... 252
maintenance safety precautions. Adding Engine Oil ...................... 253
Changing the Engine Oil and
This section also includes
Filter ....................................... 254
instructions on how to read the
Engine Coolant ........................... 256
maintenance minder messages on
Windshield Washers ................... 258
the information display, and
Transmission Fluid ..................... 259
instructions for simple maintenance
tasks you may want to take care of
Fluid ................................... 259
yourself.
Manual Transmission Fluid .... 260
If you have the skills and tools to Brake and Clutch Fluid ............... 261
Maintenance
perform more complex maintenance Lights.......................................... 262
tasks on your vehicle, you may want Cleaning the Seat Belts ............... 267
to purchase the service manual. See Floor Mats .................................. 267
page 335 for information on how to Audio Antenna ............................ 268
obtain a copy, or see your dealer. Dust and Pollen Filter ................. 268
Wiper Blades .............................. 269
Tires ........................................... 273
Checking the Battery .................. 279
Vehicle Storage ........................... 281
243
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this Injury from moving parts. Do
section should be performed by a not run the engine unless
certified technician or other qualified Improperly maintaining this instructed to do so.
mechanic. vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
Important Safety Precautions cause a crash in which you can
To eliminate potential hazards, read be seriously hurt or killed.
the instructions before you begin, Failure to properly follow
and make sure you have the tools maintenance instructions and
Always follow the inspection precautions can cause you to
and skills required. and maintenance be seriously hurt or killed.
Make sure your vehicle is parked recommendations and
on level ground, the parking brake schedules in this owner's Always follow the procedures
is set, and the engine is off. manual. and precautions in this owner's
To clean parts, use a commercially manual.
available degreaser or parts Potential Vehicle Hazards
cleaner, not gasoline.
Carbon Monoxide poison from Some of the most important safety
engine exhaust. Be sure there is precautions are given here. However,
To reduce the possibility of fire or adequate ventilation whenever you

explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, we cannot warn you of every
operate the engine. conceivable hazard that can arise in
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts. Burns from hot parts. Let the performing maintenance. Only you
engine and exhaust system cool can decide whether or not you
Wear eye protection and protective down before touching any parts. should perform a given task.
clothing when working with the
battery or compressed air.
244
Maintenance Minder
Your vehicle displays engine oil life Engine Oil Life Display The remaining engine oil life is
and maintenance service items on SELECT/RESET KNOB
shown on the display according to
the information display to show you this table:
when you should have your dealer Calculated Engine Displayed
perform engine oil replacement and Oil Life (%) Engine Oil Life (%)
indicated maintenance service. 100%91% 100%
90%81% 90%
Based on the engine operating
80%71% 80%
conditions and accumulated engine
70%61% 70%
revolutions, the onboard computer in
60%51% 60%
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a 50%41% 50%
percentage. 40%31% 40%
ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR 30%21% 30%
Maintenance
To see the current engine oil life, 20%16% 20%
turn the ignition switch to the ON 15%11% 15%
(II) position, then press and release 10%6% 10%
the select/reset knob repeatedly 5%1% 5%
until the engine oil life indicator 0% 0%
appears (see page 68).
CONTINUED
245
Maintenance Minder
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)
MAINTENANCE ENGINE OIL LIFE

MINDER INDICATOR INDICATOR
If the remaining engine oil life is 15 The 15 and 11 percent oil life When the remaining engine oil life is
to 6 percent, you will see the engine indicator reminds you that the time is 5 to 1 percent, you will see a
oil life indicator every time you turn coming soon to take your vehicle in SERVICE message along with the
the ignition switch to the ON (II) for the required maintenance. same maintenance item code(s),
position. The maintenance minder every time you turn the ignition
indicator will also come on, and the switch to the ON (II) position.
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
above the OIL LIFE message.
246
Maintenance Minder
The maintenance item code or codes

indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page 248).
You can switch the information
display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer or the trip
meter. Press and release the select/
reset knob on the instrument panel.
When the engine oil life is 15 to 1
percent, the maintenance minder NEGATIVE MILEAGE
indicator ( ) comes on every time When the remaining engine oil life is If you do not perform the indicated
you turn the ignition switch to the 0 percent, the engine oil life indicator maintenance, negative mileage is
Maintenance
ON (II) position, then it goes out if will blink. The display comes on displayed and begins to blink after
you switch the information display. every time you turn the ignition the vehicle has been driven 10 miles
When you see this message, have switch to the ON (II) position. The (10 km) or more.
the indicated maintenance performed maintenance minder indicator ( )
Negative mileage means your vehicle
by your dealer as soon as possible. also comes on and remains on in the
has passed the maintenance required
instrument panel. When you see this
point.
message, immediately have the
Immediately have the indicated
indicated maintenance done by your
maintenance done by your dealer.
dealer.
CONTINUED
247
Maintenance Minder
To change the information display Maintenance Main Items and Sub Resetting the Engine Oil Life
from the engine oil life display to the Items Display
odometer, the trip meter or average Your dealer will reset the display
fuel mileage, press and release the MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM after completing the required
select/reset knob. maintenance service. You will see
OIL LIFE 100% on the information
When the engine oil life is 0 percent
display the next time you turn the
or negative mileage, the maintenance
ignition switch to the ON (II)
minder indicator ( ) remains on
position.
even if you change the information
display. If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
Immediately have the service
reset the maintenance minder as
performed, and make sure to reset
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S) follows:
the display as described.
All maintenance items displayed on (II) position.
the information display are in code.
For an explanation of these 2. Press the select/reset knob
maintenance codes, see page 251. repeatedly until the engine oil life
is displayed.
248
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance
Precautions
If you have the required service done
but do not reset the display, or reset
the display without doing the service,
the system will not show the proper
maintenance intervals. This can lead
to serious mechanical problems
because you will no longer have an
accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
Your authorized Honda dealer knows
3. Press the select/reset knob for 4. Press the select/reset knob for your vehicle best and can provide
about 10 seconds. The engine oil another 5 seconds. The
Maintenance
competent, efficient service.
life and the maintenance item maintenance item code(s) will
code(s) will blink. disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to 100.
CONTINUED
249
Maintenance Minder
However, service at a dealer is not U.S. Vehicles: Maintenance, Engine oil level Check every
mandatory to keep your warranties in replacement, or repair of time you fill the fuel tank. See page
effect. Maintenance may be done by emissions control devices and 201.
any qualified service facility or systems may be done by any Engine coolant level Check the
person who is skilled in this type of automotive repair establishment
radiator reserve tank every time
automotive service. Make sure to or individual using parts that are
you fill the fuel tank. See page 202.
have the service facility or person certified to EPA standards.
reset the display as previously Automatic transmission Check
According to state and federal
described. Keep all receipts as proof the fluid level monthly. See page
regulations, failure to perform
of completion, and have the person 259.
maintenance on the items marked
who does the work fill out your
with will not void your emissions Brakes Check the fluid level
Honda Service History or Canadian
warranties. However, all monthly. See page 261.
Maintenance Log. Check your
maintenance services should be
warranty booklet for more Tires Check the tire pressure
performed in accordance with the
information. monthly. Examine the tread for
intervals indicated by the information
wear and foreign objects. See page
We recommend using Honda parts display.
274.
and fluids whenever you have
Owner's Maintenance Checks
maintenance done. These are Lights Check the operation of
You should check the following
manufactured to the same high the headlights, parking lights,
items at the specified intervals. If you
quality standards as the original taillights, high-mount brake light,
are unsure of how to perform any
components, so you can be confident and license plate lights monthly.
check, turn to the appropriate page
of their performance and durability. See page 262.
listed.
250
Maintenance Minder
Symbol Maintenance Main Items Symbol Maintenance Sub Items

A Replace engine oil1 1 Rotate tires
B Replace engine oil and oil filter 2 Replace air cleaner element
Inspect front and rear brakes If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000
Check parking brake adjustment miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
Suspension components
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from
Maintenance Minder
diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles
Driveshaft boots
(24,000 km).
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA)
Inspect drive belt
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
3 Replace transmission fluid

Exhaust system Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle

Fuel lines and connections speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
Check expiration date for TRK bottle2 This requires transmission fluid changes more
frequently than recommended by the maintenance
1: If the message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these
display is reset, change the engine oil every year. conditions, have the transmission fluid changed at
60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles
2: Canadian A/T models only (48,000 km). (For A/T only)
If you tow a Fit behind a motorhome, the transmission
: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page 249. fluid must be changed every 2 years or 30,000 miles
(48,000 km), whichever comes first. (For A/T only)
NOTE: Independent of maintenance messages in the information display,
4 Replace spark plugs
replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Inspect valve clearance
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
5 Replace engine coolant
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.
251
Fluid Locations
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
CLUTCH FLUID
(Manual
Transmission only)
(Gray cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK

(Orange loop)
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK (Yellow loop)
252
Adding Engine Oil
Recommended Engine Oil Honda Motor Oil is the preferred

Oil is a major contributor to your 5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
engine's performance and longevity. highly recommended that you use
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20 Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
detergent oil displaying the API optimum engine protection. Make
Certification Seal. This seal indicates sure the API Certification Seal says
the oil is energy conserving, and that For Gasoline Engines.
it meets the American Petroleum
The oil viscosity or weight is
Institute's latest requirements.
provided on the container's label.
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP round protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
Unscrew and remove the engine oil fuel economy.
fill cap on the valve cover. Pour in the
Maintenance
oil slowly and carefully so you do not
spill any. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level on
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could Ambient Temperature
damage the engine.
CONTINUED
253
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Synthetic Oil Changing the Engine Oil and WASHER

You may use a synthetic motor oil if Filter
it meets the same requirements Always change the oil and filter
given for a conventional motor oil, it according to the maintenance
displays the API Certification Seal, messages shown on the information
and it is the proper weight. You must display. The oil and filter collect
follow the oil and filter change contaminants that can damage your
intervals shown on the information engine if they are not removed
display. regularly.
Engine Oil Additives Changing the oil and filter requires
Your vehicle does not require any oil special tools and access from OIL DRAIN BOLT
additives. Additives may adversely underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
affect the engine or transmission should be raised on a service station- 1. Run the engine until it reaches
performance and durability. normal operating temperature,
type hydraulic lift for this service.
then shut it off.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have 2. Open the hood, and remove the
this maintenance done by a skilled engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
mechanic. drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
254
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER 5. Put a new washer on the drain

bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to: Improper disposal of engine oil can be
29 lbfft (39 Nm, 4.0 kgfm) harmful to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
6. Refill the engine with the the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
recommended oil. container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
Engine oil change capacity or dump it on the ground.
(including filter):
3.8 US qt (3.6 L)
7. Replace the engine oil fill cap. Start
3. Remove the oil filter, and let the the engine. The oil pressure
remaining oil drain. A special indicator should go out within 5
Maintenance
wrench (available from your seconds. If it does not, turn off the
dealer) is required. engine, and check your work.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is 8. Let the engine run for several
not stuck to the engine block. If it minutes, then check the drain bolt
is, remove it before installing a and oil filter for leaks.
new oil filter. 9. Turn off the engine, let it sit for
4. Install a new oil filter according to several minutes, then check the oil
the instructions that come with it. level on the dipstick. If necessary,
Make sure to clean off any dirt and add more oil.
dust on the connecting surface of a
new oil filter.
255
Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant Always use Honda Long-life Anti- If the reserve tank is completely
freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant empty, you should also check the
is pre-mixed with 50 percent coolant level in the radiator.
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or plain
water.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not Removing the radiator cap
available, you may use another while the engine is hot can
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a cause the coolant to spray out,
temporary replacement. Make sure it seriously scalding you.
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum Always let the engine and
RESERVE TANK
engines. Continued use of any non- radiator cool down before
Honda coolant can result in removing the radiator cap.
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add corrosion, causing the cooling
coolant to bring it up to the MAX system to malfunction or fail. Have
line. Inspect the cooling system for the cooling system flushed and
leaks. refilled with Honda antifreeze/
coolant as soon as possible.
256
Engine Coolant
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.

Fill it halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle's
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
RADIATOR CAP RESERVE TANK
1. Make sure the engine and radiator 4. The coolant level should be up to
are cool. the base of the filler neck. Add
Maintenance
coolant if it is low.
2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap Pour the coolant slowly and
counterclockwise, without carefully so you do not spill any.
pressing down. Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
3. Remove the radiator cap by
engine compartment.
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise. 5. Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
257
Windshield Washers
Check the fluid level in the Fill up to here On Canadian models: The low washer
windshield washer reservoir at least level indicator comes on when the
monthly during normal use. This level is low (see page 65).
reservoir supplies the windshield and
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
rear window washers.
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
WINDSHIELD WASHER RESERVOIR
on a clean cloth. This will help to
On U.S. models: To check the condition the blade edges.
windshield washer fluid level, open
the hood and look for the windshield
washer reservoir located behind the
right headlight. You will see a 1/2 Do not use engine antifreeze or a
mark on the reservoir. vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze
can damage your vehicle's paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer fluid.
258
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid 4. Remove the dipstick, and check

DIPSTICK the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
HOT UPPER
MARK MARK 5. If the level is below the lower
LOWER mark, add fluid into the dipstick
MARK
hole to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) spill immediately; it could damage
from the transmission, and wipe it components in the engine
Maintenance
Check the fluid level with the engine compartment.
with a clean cloth.
at normal operating temperature.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into Always use Honda ATF-Z1
1. Park the vehicle on level ground. (automatic transmission fluid).
Start the engine, let it run until the the transmission securely as
radiator fan comes on, then shut shown in the illustration.
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2.
CONTINUED
259
Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid Put a new washer on the filler bolt,

then reinstall the filler bolt and
Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 FILLER BOLT tighten it securely.
(automatic transmission fluid). Do not
mix with other transmission fluids. If Honda MTF is not available, you
Using transmission fluid other than may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 may cause viscosity motor oil with the API
deterioration in transmission operation Certification seal that says FOR
and durability, and could result in GASOLINE ENGINES as a
damage to the transmission. temporary replacement. However,
Damage resulting from the use of motor oil does not contain the proper
transmission fluid other than Honda additives, and continued use can
Genuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by the Correct level WASHER cause stiffer shifting. Replace as soon
Honda new vehicle warranty. as it is convenient.
Check the fluid level with the If you are not sure how to check and
transmission at normal operating add fluid, contact your dealer.
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back temperature and the vehicle on level
into the transmission securely as ground.
shown in the illustration. Remove the transmission filler bolt,
If you are not sure how to add fluid, and carefully feel inside the bolt hole
contact your dealer. with your finger. The fluid level
should be up to the edge of the bolt
hole. If it is not, add Honda Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it
starts to run out of the hole.
260
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check the brake fluid level in the Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not Brake Fluid
reservoirs monthly. compatible with your vehicle's
There are up to two reservoirs, braking system and can cause
depending on the model. They are: extensive damage.
Brake fluid reservoir (all models)
Clutch fluid reservoir

(manual transmission models
only)
Replace the brake fluid according to
the time recommendation in the
maintenance minder schedule. MAX MIN
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Maintenance
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not The fluid level should be between
available, you should use only DOT 3 the MIN and MAX marks on the side
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed of the reservoir. If the level is at or
container, as a temporary below the MIN mark, your brake
replacement. system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can worn brake pads/shoes.
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
CONTINUED
261
Brake and Clutch Fluid, Lights
Clutch Fluid Headlight Aiming ELECTRICAL BULB HOLD-DOWN

Manual Transmission only The headlights were properly aimed CONNECTOR WIRE
when your vehicle was new. If you
MAX
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area, readjustment may be
required. Adjustments should be
done by your dealer or another
qualified mechanic.
Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle RUBBER WEATHER SEAL
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard 1. Open the hood.
MIN
objects. If you touch the glass, clean 2. Remove the electrical connector
The fluid level should be between it with denatured alcohol and a clean from the bulb by pulling the
the MIN and MAX marks on the side cloth. connector straight back.
of the reservoir. If it is not, add brake
3. Remove the rubber weather seal
fluid to bring it up to that level. Use
by pulling on the tab.
the same fluid specified for the brake
system. Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
A low fluid level can indicate a leak in when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
the clutch system. Have this system on the glass can cause the bulb to
inspected as soon as possible. overheat and shatter.
262
Lights
4. Unclip the end of the hold-down HOLD-DOWN Replacing a Parking Light/Front

wire from its slot. Pivot the wire WIRE Side Marker Bulb
out of the way, then remove the
bulb.
5. Install the new bulb into the hole,
making sure the tabs are in their
slots. Pivot the hold-down wire
back in place, and clip the end into
the slot.
INSPECTION WINDOW
6. Make sure that the hold-down wire

is installed properly and securely.
Maintenance
You can check its installation from
1. Open the hood.
the inspection window on the
headlight assembly. 2. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
7. Install the rubber seal over the
back of the headlight assembly. 3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
8. Push the electrical connector onto
into the socket until it bottoms.
the new bulb. Make sure it is
connected securely. Turn on the 4. Reinstall the socket into the light
headlights to test the new bulb. assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
CONTINUED
263
Lights
5. Turn on the lights to make sure Replacing a Front Turn Signal 5. Reinstall the socket into the light
the new bulb is working. Light Bulb assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
6. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
1. Open the hood.

2. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pushing the bulb in and turning
it counterclockwise until it unlocks.
4. Install the new bulb in the socket.
Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.
264
Lights
Replacing a Fog Light Bulb 5. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
On Sport model and turn it one-quarter turn
The fog lights use halogen bulbs. clockwise to lock it in place.
When replacing a bulb, handle it
6. Push the electrical connector back
carefully. See page 262 for more
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
information.
all the way.
7. Turn on the fog lights to test the
new bulb.
8. Reinstall the fog light assembly,
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR then tighten the screw.
3. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by squeezing the
Maintenance
connector to unlock the tab, then
slide the connector off the bulb.
SCREW 4. Remove the bulb by turning it
about one-quarter turn
1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to counterclockwise.
remove the screw.
2. To remove the fog light assembly,
pull it out of the bumper.
CONTINUED
265
Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs 4. Remove the burned out bulb from

the socket by pulling it straight out
of its socket.
5. Install the new bulb in the socket.
6. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
7. Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
8. Reinstall the light assembly cover.
LIGHT ASSEMBLY COVER 2. Determine which of the three
bulbs is burned out: stop/taillight,
1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
back-up light, or turn signal light.
the edge of the light assembly
cover to prevent scratches. 3. Remove the socket by turning it
Remove the cover by carefully one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
prying in the notch on its middle
edge with a flat-tip screwdriver.
266
Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Cleaning the Seat Belts Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat Floor Mats
belt anchors can cause the belts to
LOOP retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth Unlock
dampened in mild soap and warm Lock
water or isopropyl alcohol.
KNOB
Maintenance
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft The driver's floor mat that came with
brush with a mixture of mild soap your vehicle hooks over the floor mat
and warm water to clean them. Do anchors. To lock each hook, turn the
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning knob clockwise. This keeps the floor
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before mat from sliding forward and
you use the vehicle. possibly interfering with the pedals.
When cleaning or replacing, turn the
knob counterclockwise to unhook
the floor mat.
CONTINUED
267
Floor Mats, Audio Antenna, Dust and Pollen Filter
If you remove the driver's floor mat, Audio Antenna Dust and Pollen Filter
make sure to re-anchor it when you On models with A/C
put it back in your vehicle. This filter removes the dust and
pollen that is brought in from the
If you use a non-Honda floor mats,
outside through the heating and
make sure they fit properly and that
cooling system.
they can be anchored securely. Do
not put additional floor mats on top of Have your dealer replace the filter
the anchored mat. when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the flow from
the heating and cooling system
becomes less than usual.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
antenna at the rear of the roof. Before
using a drive-through car wash,
remove the antenna by unscrewing it by
hand. This prevents the antenna from
being damaged by the car wash
brushes.
268
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper WIPER ARMS

blades at least every six months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
LOCK TAB
To replace a front wiper blade: 2. Disconnect the blade assembly

from the wiper arm:
Maintenance
1. Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield. Raise the driver's side
Put a cloth on the edge of the
first, then the passenger's side. lock tab to prevent scratches,
then push up on the lock tab
carefully with a flat-tip
screwdriver.
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.
CONTINUED
269
Wiper Blades
WIPER ARM BLADE 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If

they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in the
slots along the edge of the new
blade.
REINFORCEMENT
BLADE
TOP

Pivot the blade assembly toward 3. Remove the blade from its holder
the wiper arm until it releases by grabbing the tabbed end of the
from the wiper arm. blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
When replacing a wiper blade,
make sure not to drop the wiper
blade or wiper arm down on the
windshield.
Make sure the two rubber tabs

inside the blade fit to each notch of
the reinforcement, as shown.
270
Wiper Blades
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly

onto the wiper arm. Push down the
lock tab. Make sure the wiper
blade assembly locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield, the passenger's
side first, then the driver's side.
5. Place the top of the wiper blade on To replace the rear wiper blade:
the end of the blade assembly, and
Maintenance
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
slide the blade onto the assembly. window.
Make sure the blade is completely 2. Disconnect the blade assembly
installed. from the wiper arm by pivoting the
blade assembly upward.
CONTINUED
271
Wiper Blades
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
3. Slide the blade out of the holder. 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If 5. Slide the new blade into the
they have no plastic or metal holder. Make sure it is engaged in
reinforcement along the back the slot along its full length.
edge, remove the metal
Insert both ends of the blade into
reinforcement strips from the old
the holder. Make sure they are
wiper blade, and install them in the
secure.
slots along the edge of the new
blade. 6. Install the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm against the
windshield.
272
Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your Inflation Guidelines Even though your vehicle is
tires must be the proper type and Keeping the tires properly inflated equipped with TPMS, we
size, in good condition with adequate provides the best combination of recommend that you visually check
tread, and correctly inflated. handling, tread life, and riding your tires every day. If you think a
comfort. tire might be low, check it
The following pages give more
immediately with a tire gauge.
detailed information on how to take
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
care of your tires and what to do adversely affect handling and fuel Use a gauge to measure the air
when they need to be replaced. economy, and are more likely to pressure in each tire at least once a
fail from being overheated. month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
Overinflated tires can make your
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per
vehicle ride more harshly, are
Using tires that are excessively month. Remember to check the
more prone to damage from road
worn or improperly inflated can spare tire (if equipped) at the same
hazards, and wear unevenly.
Maintenance
cause a crash in which you can time.
be seriously hurt or killed. The tire pressure monitoring system
Check the air pressures when the
(TPMS) warns you when a tire
tires are cold. This means the vehicle
Follow all instructions in this pressure is low. See page 235 for
has been parked for at least 3 hours,
owner's manual regarding tire more information.
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
inflation and maintenance. : If equipped Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures.
CONTINUED
273
Tires
If you check air pressures when the Recommended Tire Pressures If equipped
tires are hot [driven for several miles The following charts show the The compact spare tire pressure is:
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4 recommended cold tire pressures for 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 most normal and high-speed driving
For convenience, the recommended
kgf/cm2) higher than the cold conditions.
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
readings. This is normal. Do not let
All models except Sport on a label on the driver's doorjamb.
air out to match the recommended
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
cold air pressure. The tire will be for Normal Driving For additional information about your
underinflated. 175/65R15 84S Front/Rear: tires, see page 323.
32 psi (220 kPa,
You should get your own tire 2.2 kgf/cm2)
pressure gauge and use it whenever
Sport model
you check your tire pressures. This
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
will make it easier for you to tell if a for Normal Driving
pressure loss is due to a tire problem 185/55R16 83H Front/Rear:
and not due to a variation between 33 psi (230 kPa,
gauges. 2.3 kgf/cm2)
While tubeless tires have some

ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
274
Tires
Tire Inspection INDICATOR LOCATION MARK Tire Service Life

Every time you check inflation, you The service life of your tires is
should also examine the tires for dependent on many factors,
damage, foreign objects, and wear. including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
You should look for: loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
Bumps or bulges in the tread or environmental conditions (even

side of the tire. Replace the tire if when the tires are not in use).
you find either of these conditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of In addition to your regular
the tire. Replace the tire if you can TREAD WEAR INDICATOR inspections and inflation pressure
see fabric or cord. Your tires have wear indicators maintenance, it is recommended that
molded into the tread. When the you have annual inspections
Maintenance
Excessive tread wear. tread wears down, you will see a 1/2 performed once the tires reach five
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the years old. It is also recommended
tread. This shows there is less than that all tires, including the spare, be
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on removed from service after 10 years
the tire. from the date of manufacture,
A tire this worn gives very little regardless of their condition or state
traction on wet roads. You should of wear.
replace the tire if you can see three The last four digits of the TIN (tire
or more tread wear indicators. identification number) are found on
the sidewall of the tire and indicate
the date of manufacture (See Tire
Labeling on page 323).
CONTINUED
275
Tires
Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and Wheels

In addition to proper inflation, correct Front Front
Replace your tires with radial tires of
wheel alignment helps to decrease the same size, load range, speed
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn rating, and maximum cold tire
unevenly, have your dealer check the pressure rating (as shown on the
wheel alignment. tire's sidewall).
Have your dealer check the tires if Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
you feel a consistent vibration while your vehicle can reduce braking
driving. A tire should always be ability, traction, and steering
rebalanced if it is removed from the accuracy. Using tires of a different
wheel. When you have new tires size or construction can cause the
(For Non-directional (For Directional
installed, make sure they are Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels) ABS and vehicle stability assist
balanced. This increases riding system (VSA) to work
comfort and tire life. For best results, To help increase tire life and inconsistently.
have the installer perform a dynamic distribute wear more evenly, rotate The ABS and VSA system work by
balance. the tires according to the comparing the speed of the wheels.
maintenance messages displayed on When replacing tires, use the same
the information display. Move the size originally supplied with the
tires to the positions shown in the vehicle. Tire size and construction
On vehicles with aluminum wheels, illustration each time they are can affect wheel speed and may
improper wheel weights can damage rotated. If you purchase directional cause the system to activate.
your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use tires, rotate only front-to-back.
only Honda wheel weights for : If equipped
When the tires are rotated, make
balancing. sure the air pressures are checked.
276
Tires
It is best to replace all four tires at Wheel and Tire Specifications

the same time. If that is not possible Wheels:
or necessary, replace the two front Installing improper tires on your All models except Sport
tires or two rear tires as a pair. vehicle can affect handling and 15 x 5 1/2J
Replacing just one tire can seriously stability. This can cause a crash Sport model
affect your vehicle's handling. in which you can be seriously 16 x 6J
hurt or killed.
If you ever replace a wheel, make Tires:
sure that the wheel's specifications Always use the size and type of All models except Sport
match those of the original wheels. tires recommended in this 175/65R15 84S
owner's manual. Sport model
Also be sure you use only TPMS
185/55R16 83H
specific wheels (if equipped). If you
do not, the tire pressure monitoring See page 321 for DOT tire quality
system will not work. grading information, and page 323
Maintenance
for tire size and labeling information.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
CONTINUED
277
Tires
Winter Driving Tire Chains

Tires marked M S or All Mount tire chains on your tires when
Season on the sidewall have an all- required by driving conditions or Traction devices that are the wrong size
weather tread design suitable for local laws. Install them only on the or improperly installed can damage
most winter driving conditions. front tires. your vehicle's brake lines, suspension,
body, and wheels. Stop driving if they
For the best performance in snowy Because your vehicle has limited tire are hitting any part of the vehicle.
or icy conditions, you should install clearance, Honda strongly
snow tires or tire chains. They may recommends using the chains listed
be required by local laws under below, made by Security Chain
certain conditions. Company (SCC).
Snow Tires All models except Sport Using the wrong chains, or not
If you mount snow tires on your SC1026 properly installing chains, can
vehicle, make sure they are radial damage the brake lines and
Sport model
tires of the same size and load range cause a crash in which you can
SC1030
as the original tires. Mount snow be seriously injured or killed.
tires on all four wheels. The traction When installing cables, follow the
provided by snow tires on dry roads manufacturer's instructions, and Follow all instructions in this
may be lower than your original tires. mount them as tight as you can. owner's manual regarding the
Check with the tire dealer for Make sure they are not contacting selection and use of tire chains.
maximum speed recommendations. the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.
278
Tires, Checking the Battery
Wheels Checking the Battery Check the terminals for corrosion (a

Clean the wheels as you would the TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
white or yellowish powder). To
rest of the exterior. Wash them with remove it, cover the terminals with a
the same solution, and rinse them solution of baking soda and water. It
thoroughly. will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
If equipped
water. Dry off the battery with a cloth
Aluminum alloy wheels have a
or paper towel. Coat the terminals
protective clear-coat that keeps the
with grease to help prevent future
aluminum from corroding and
corrosion.
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
harsh chemicals (including some If additional battery maintenance is
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff needed, see your dealer or a
brush can damage the clear-coat. To qualified technician.
Maintenance
clean the wheels, use a mild Check the condition of the battery
detergent and a soft brush or sponge. monthly by looking at the test
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator's
colors.
The location of the test indicator
window varies between
manufacturers.
CONTINUED
279
Checking the Battery
WARNING: Battery posts, On vehicles with navigation system

terminals, and related accessories The navigation system will also
contain lead and lead compounds. The battery gives off explosive disable itself. The next time you turn
Wash your hands after handling. hydrogen gas during normal on the ignition switch, the system
operation. will require you to enter ENTER
If you need to connect the battery to
CODE before it can be used. Refer
a charger, disconnect both cables to A spark or flame can cause the to the navigation system manual.
prevent damaging your vehicle's battery to explode with enough
electrical system. Always disconnect force to kill or seriously hurt
the negative () cable first, and you.
reconnect it last.
On vehicles without navigation system Wear protective clothing and a
If your vehicle's battery is face shield, or have a skilled
disconnected, or goes dead, the time technician do the battery
setting is lost. To reset the time, see maintenance.
page 192.
If your vehicle's battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the
audio system may disable itself. The
next time you turn on the radio, you
will see ENTER CODE in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the code (see page
191).
280
Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for If the vehicle is to be stored for a Cover the vehicle with a
an extended period (more than 1 longer period, it should be breathable cover, one made from
month), there are several things you supported on jackstands so the a porous material such as cotton.
should do to prepare it for storage. tires are off the ground. Non-porous materials, such as
Proper preparation helps prevent plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
Leave one window open slightly (if
deterioration and makes it easier to which can damage the paint.
the vehicle is being stored
get your vehicle back on the road. If
indoors). If possible, periodically run the
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
engine until it reaches full
Disconnect the battery.
Fill the fuel tank. operating temperature (the cooling
Support the front and rear wiper fans cycle on and off twice).
Wash and dry the exterior
blade arms with a folded towel or Preferably, do this once a month.
completely.
rag so they do not touch the
Clean the interior. Make sure the windshield.
Maintenance
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are To minimize sticking, apply a
completely dry.
silicone spray lubricant to all door
Leave the parking brake off. Put and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
the transmission in reverse vehicle body wax to the painted
(manual) or Park (automatic). surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
Block the rear wheels.
281
282
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more Compact Spare Tire .................... 284
common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tire ................... 285
experience with their vehicles. It Temporarily Repairing a Flat
gives you information about how to Tire ......................................... 291
safely evaluate the problem and what If the Engine Won't Start ............. 297
to do to correct it. If the problem has Jump Starting .............................. 299
stranded you on the side of the road, If the Engine Overheats .............. 301
you may be able to get going again. If Low Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 303
not, you will also find instructions on Charging System Indicator ......... 303
getting your vehicle towed. Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 304
Brake System Indicator ............... 305
Fuses .......................................... 306
Fuse Locations ............................ 309
Emergency Towing ..................... 311
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck .......... 312

283
Compact Spare Tire
Except all Canadian models with Follow these precautions: INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
automatic transmission
Use the compact spare tire as a
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
temporary replacement only. Get This tire gives a harsher ride and
your regular tire repaired or less traction on some road
replaced, and put it back on your surfaces. Use greater caution while
vehicle as soon as you can. driving.
Check the inflation pressure of the
Do not mount tire chains on the
compact spare tire every time you compact spare tire.
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
Do not use your compact spare tire TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2) on another vehicle unless it is the
same make and model. Replace the tire when you can see
On vehicles with the TPMS the tread wear indicator bars. The
system, the low tire pressure replacement should be the same size
indicator comes on and stays on and design tire, mounted on the
after you replace the flat tire with same wheel. The spare tire is not
the compact spare tire. After designed to be mounted on a regular
several miles (kilometers) driving wheel, and the spare wheel is not
with the compact spare tire, the designed for mounting a regular tire.
TPMS indicator comes on and the
low tire pressure indicator goes
off.
284
Changing a Flat Tire
Except all Canadian models with FLOOR LID LOOP

automatic transmission
If you have a flat tire while driving, The vehicle can easily roll off
SPARE
stop in a safe place to change it. the jack, seriously injuring TIRE
Drive slowly along the shoulder until anyone underneath.
you get to an exit or an area to stop Follow the directions for
that is far away from the traffic lanes. changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
TOOL KIT JACK STRAP
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and 4. Open the tailgate. Raise the cargo
non-slippery ground. Put the area floor lid by lifting it up with
transmission in Park (automatic) the back of the strap. To keep the
or reverse (manual). Apply the floor lid open, hook the looped

parking brake. side of the strap to the legs of the
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights, rear center head restraint.
and turn the ignition switch to the 5. Take the tool kit out of the spare
LOCK (0) position. Have all tire.
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
3. Lift the rear center head restraint.
CONTINUED
285
EXTENSION WHEEL NUT
WHEEL COVER WHEEL NUT WRENCH

6. Take the jack out of the cargo area. 8. On all models except Sport and 9. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
Canadian LX model with manual with the wheel nut wrench.
Turn the jack's end bracket
transmission, remove the wheel
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
cover by carefully prying under its
remove the jack by lifting it
edge with the flat tip of the
straight up.
extension.
7. Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well.
286
BRAKE HUB
EXTENSION
JACKING POINT WHEEL NUT WRENCH

10. Place the jack under the jacking 11. Use the extension and the wheel 13. Before mounting the spare tire,
point nearest the tire you need to nut wrench as shown to raise the wipe any dirt off the mounting
change. It is pointed to by a vehicle until the flat tire is off the surface of the wheel and hub with
mark molded into the underside of ground. a clean cloth. Wipe the hub

the body (Sport model). Turn the carefully; it may be hot from
12. Remove the wheel nuts, then
end bracket clockwise until the top driving.
remove the flat tire. Handle the
of the jack contacts the jacking
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
point. Make sure the jacking point
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
tab is resting in the jack notch.
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
CONTINUED
287
14. Put on the spare tire. Put the

wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against the
hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
15. Lower the vehicle to the ground, TAB
and remove the jack.
FLOOR LID
16. Tighten the wheel nuts securely in 18. Remove the strap loop from the
the same crisscross pattern. Have legs of the head restraint and
the wheel nut torque checked at lower the cargo area floor lid.
the nearest automotive service
19. Pull the floor lid toward you and
facility.
remove the tabs.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
80 lbfft (108 Nm, 11 kgfm) 20. Pull the floor lid out.
17. On Sport model and Canadian LX
model with manual transmission:
Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire.
288
23. Store the jack. Place the tool kit in 24. Place the floor lid in the cargo
the center of the flat tire. area.
25. Store the wheel cover or center
cap in the cargo area. Make sure it
will not get scratched or damaged.
Loose items can fly around the
For For interior in a crash and could 26. Close the tailgate.
normal spare
tire tire seriously injure the occupants. 27. On U.S. models
Your vehicle's original tire has a
Store the wheel, jack, and tools tire pressure monitoring system
securely before driving. sensor. To replace a tire, refer to
Changing a Tire with TPMS (see
21. Place the flat tire face down in the page 237).
spare tire well.
22. Secure the flat tire by screwing the

wing bolt back into its hole.
CONTINUED
289
Installing a wheel cover
WIRE SUPPORT RING

CLIPS CLIPS 2. Align the valve mark on the wheel 3. Make sure the wire support ring is
cover to the tire valve on the on the outer side of the tire valve
All models except Sport and Canadian
LX model with manual transmission wheel, then install the wheel as shown.
cover.
1. Make sure the wire support ring is
hooked into the clips around the
edge of the wheel cover.
290
Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
How to Use the Tire Repair Kit If you have a flat tire while driving, TIRE VALVE
All Canadian models with automatic park the vehicle on a level surface in
transmission a safe place, put the transmission in
To reduce weight, your vehicle is Park (P), set the parking brake, and
equipped with a tire repair kit instead turn the hazard lights on.
of a spare tire. This kit will allow you Thoroughly examine the tire for a
to temporarily repair a flat tire under puncture or other damage.
the following conditions:
If a puncture is wider than 3/16ths of
Only one tire is flat. an inch (4 mm), or is located in the
The puncture is smaller than tire sidewall, do not attempt to repair
3/16ths of an inch (4 mm). the tire. Have your vehicle towed to a VALVE CAP
Honda service center. In Canada or
The puncture is located within the 1. Park vehicle on a level surface in a
the continental U.S.A. simply call 1-

tread. safe place. Set shifter lever into
800-465-PLUS (7587) for Honda Plus PARK and engage the parking
The wheel rim is not damaged. Roadside Assistance. brake. Turn hazard light on.

If the damage is smaller than 3/16ths Remove valve cap from tire valve.
The tire bead is seated.

of an inch (4 mm) and within the tire
When making a temporary repair, tread, proceed with the following
carefully follow all instructions in this instructions.
owner's manual and in the
instructions that came with the kit.
CONTINUED
291
FLOOR LID An empty recovery bottle. A tire

repair professional will use this to
collect the injected sealant from the
tire during the permanent repair.
TIRE REPAIR KIT STRAP

2. Open the tailgate. Your tire repair kit contains:
3. Raise the cargo area floor lid by An air pump with a power cord and
lifting it up with the back of the an air hose attached.
strap. Remove the tire repair kit. EXPIRATION DATE
A bottle of sealant with a filler hose
attached. 4. Remove the sealant bottle and
check the expiration date on the
Two labels, one for the tire wheel label. If the date has expired, do not
and one for the instrument panel. continue. Have your vehicle towed
to the nearest Honda service
An instruction sheet.
center. In Canada or the
continental U.S.A. simply call 1-800-
465-PLUS (7587) for Honda Plus
Roadside Assistance.
292
If the date has not expired, shake AIR PUMP BOTTLE CAP ADAPTER PLUG
the bottle thoroughly and proceed
to step 5.
TIRE VALVE
BOTTLE
CAP
AIR PUMP HOSE ACCESSORY SOCKET

6. Unscrew the bottle cap from the 8. Route the power cord into the
bottle adapter. vehicle, and insert the plug into the
BOTTLE HOSE accessory power socket.
7. Remove the air pump from the

5. Screw the sealant filler hose onto repair kit, then screw the air pump Pay attention not to have the power
the tire valve. Make sure the bottle hose onto the bottle adapter tightly. cord pinched by the door.
remains upright to ensure all of the
sealant flows into the tire.
ACCESSORY (I) position.
CONTINUED
293
In freezing temperatures, turn the AIR PUMP SWITCH 11. Inflate the tire to 33 psi (230 kPa),
engine on and leave it running then turn the air pump switch OFF
while the flat tire is being serviced. for an accurate pressure reading. If
Prolonged exposure to the cold OFF the pressure fails to reach 33 psi
may cause the vehicle's battery to (230 kPa) within 15 minutes, do
weaken. Under cold conditions, ON not continue, and have the vehicle
safely start the vehicle's engine and towed. In Canada or the
keep the engine running at idle continental U.S.A. simply call 1-
when operating the air pump. 800-465-PLUS (7587) for Honda
Plus Roadside Assistance.
Running the engine with the LOCK (0) position.
10. Turn the air pump on to inflate the
vehicle in an enclosed or even tire. Do not run the air pump for 13. Remove the sealant bottle hose
partly enclosed area can cause more than 15 minutes or it may from the tire valve, then reinstall
a rapid build-up of toxic carbon overheat. The air pressure gauge the tire valve cap.
monoxide. will show about 40 to 60 psi (275 to
Breathing this colorless, 415 kPa) for the first few minutes
odorless gas can cause while the sealant is pumped into
unconsciousness and even the tire, and then the pressure will
death. Only run the engine to go down to about 10 to 20 psi (70
power the air pump with the to 140 kPa).
vehicle outdoors.
294
AIR PRESSURE GAUGE LABEL
WHEEL LABEL
DEFLATE BUTTON
14. Push the deflate button on the air 15. Remove the wheel label from the 16. Remove the front pillar label from
pump until the air pressure gauge repair kit, wipe any dirt off the the repair kit and place it as shown
shows 0 psi. wheel with a clean cloth, and above.
attach the label to the center of the

17. Remove the power plug from the
wheel.
accessory power socket.
The label may adhere poorly when
18. Return all items except the air
cold. Clean the surface and
pump to the repair kit, and store
securely attach the label.
the kit in the cargo floor box. Keep
the air pump handy as you may
need it soon.
CONTINUED
295
19. Drive carefully within the speed of If pressure is less than 19 psi (130
50 mph (80 km/h) for 5 minutes. kPa), do not drive the vehicle
further or attempt to re-inflate the
tire. Call or wait for help. If
pressure is lower than 33 psi (230
VALVE CAP TIRE VALVE kPa) and higher than 19 psi (130
kPa), use air pump to bring tire
pressure to 33 psi (230 kPa).
21. Then, drive carefully within the
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) for 5
AIR PUMP HOSE minutes more.
20. Stop safely and check the pressure 22. Stop safely and check the pressure
in the tire. Remove the tire valve in the tire.
cap, screw the air pump hose onto
the tire valve, and check the air
gauge. (You do not need to attach
the power cord or turn the air
pump switch on.)
296
Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won't Start
If the pressure is lower than 32 psi If the Engine Won't Start Nothing Happens or the Starter
(220 kPa) and higher than 19 psi Diagnosing why the engine won't Motor Operates Very Slowly
(130 kPa), use the air pump to start falls into two areas, depending When you turn the ignition switch to
bring air to the desired level as on what you hear when you turn the the START (III) position, you do not
described in step 11. Then drive to ignition switch to the START (III) hear the normal noise of the engine
the nearest service station at no position: trying to start. You may hear a
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). clicking sound, a series of clicks, or

You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine's starter nothing at all.
If the pressure is below 19 psi, do
motor does not operate at all, or Check these things:
not continue. Have the vehicle
towed (see page 311). operates very slowly. Check the transmission interlock.
If you have a manual transmission,
In any case, be sure to have the You can hear the starter motor
the clutch pedal must be pushed
damaged tire permanently repaired operating normally, or the starter
all the way to the floor or the
as soon as possible. motor sounds like it is spinning
starter will not operate. With an
faster than normal, but the engine
Remember to return the tire sealant automatic transmission, it must be
does not start up and run.

bottle to your Honda service center in Park or neutral.
for proper disposal. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 299.
CONTINUED
297
If the Engine Won't Start
Turn the ignition switch to the The Starter Operates Normally Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
START (III) position. If the In this case, the starter motor's speed gauge; the low fuel indicator may
headlights do not dim, check the sounds normal, or even faster than not be working.
condition of the fuses. If the fuses normal, when you turn the ignition There may be an electrical
are OK, there is probably switch to the START (III) position,
problem, such as no power to the
something wrong with the but the engine does not run.
fuel pump. Check all the fuses (see
electrical circuit for the ignition
Are you using a properly coded page 306).
switch or starter motor. You will
key? An improperly coded key will
need a qualified technician to If you find nothing wrong, you will
cause the immobilizer system
determine the problem. See need a qualified technician to find the
indicator in the instrument panel
Emergency Towing on page 311. problem. See Emergency Towing on
to blink rapidly (see page 79).
page 311.
If the headlights dim noticeably or go Are you using the proper starting
out when you try to start the engine,
procedure? Refer to Starting the
either the battery is discharged or
Engine on page 216.
the connections are corroded. Check
the condition of the battery and
terminal connections (see page 279).
You can then try jump starting the
vehicle from a booster battery (see
page 299).
298
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

procedure, you should take several 1. Open the hood, and check the
precautions. physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
A battery can explode if you do jump starting until it thaws.
not follow the correct
procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
BOOSTER BATTERY
Keep all sparks, open flames, electrolyte inside can freeze. Attempting
and smoking materials away to jump start with a frozen battery can The numbers in the illustration show
from the battery. cause it to rupture. you the order to connect the jumper
cables.

You cannot start your vehicle with an 2. Turn off all the electrical
automatic transmission by pushing accessories: heater, A/C (if
or pulling it. equipped), audio system, lights,
etc. Put the transmission in neutral
(manual) or Park (automatic), and
set the parking brake.
CONTINUED
299
Jump Starting
5. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, have an assistant start that
vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
6. Start your vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
7. Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
3. Remove the cover from the under- 4. Connect the second jumper cable positive cable from your vehicle,
hood fuse box (see page 306). to the negative () terminal on then from the booster battery.
Connect one jumper cable to the the booster battery. Connect the Keep the ends of the jumper cables
positive () terminal on your other end to the ground strap as away from each other and any metal
battery. Connect the other end to shown. Do not connect this jumper on the vehicle until everything is
the positive () terminal on the cable to any other part of the disconnected. Otherwise, you may
booster battery. engine. cause an electrical short.
300
If the Engine Overheats
The high temperature indicator 3. If you do not see steam or spray,

should be off under most conditions. leave the engine running, and
If the engine coolant temperature Steam and spray from an check the high temperature
gets higher than normal, the overheated engine can indicator. If the high heat is due to
indicator will blink. If it stays on, you seriously scald you. overloading, the engine should
should determine the reason (hot start to cool down almost
day, driving up a steep hill, etc.). Do not open the hood if steam immediately. If it does, wait until
is coming out. the high temperature indicator
If the vehicle overheats, you should
goes off, then continue driving.
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the high 1. Safely pull to the side of the road. 4. If the high temperature indicator
temperature indicator blinking or Put the transmission in neutral stays on, turn off the engine.
remaining on. Or you may see steam (manual) or Park (automatic), and
or spray coming from under the set the parking brake. Turn off all
hood. accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning lights.

2. If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
Driving with the high temperature off the engine. Wait until you see
indicator on can cause serious damage no more signs of steam or spray,
to your engine. then open the hood.
CONTINUED
301
If the Engine Overheats
5. Look for any obvious coolant 9. Start the engine, and set the
leaks, such as a split radiator hose. temperature control dial to
Everything is still extremely hot, Removing the radiator cap maximum heat. Add coolant to the
so use caution. If you find a leak, it while the engine is hot can radiator up to the base of the filler
must be repaired before you cause the coolant to spray out, neck. If you do not have the proper
continue driving (see Emergency seriously scalding you. coolant mixture available, you can
Towing on page 311). add plain water. Remember to
Always let the engine and have the cooling system drained
6. If you don't find an obvious leak, radiator cool down before and refilled with the proper
check the coolant level in the removing the radiator cap. mixture as soon as you can.
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark. 10. Put the radiator cap back on
8. Using gloves or a large heavy tightly. Run the engine, and check
7. If there was no coolant in the cloth, turn the radiator cap the high temperature indicator. If
reserve tank, you may need to add counterclockwise, without pushing it begins to blink or comes on
coolant to the radiator. Let the down, to the first stop. After the again, the engine needs repair (see
engine cool down until the high pressure releases, push down on Emergency Towing on page 311).
temperature indicator goes off the cap, and turn it until it comes
before checking the radiator. off. 11. If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has gone
down, add coolant to the MAX
mark. Put the cap back on tightly.
302
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator 1. Safely pull off the road, and shut Charging System Indicator
This indicator should never off the engine. Turn on the hazard If the charging system
come on when the engine is warning lights. indicator comes on brightly
running. If it starts flashing or stays 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute. when the engine is running, the
on, the oil pressure has dropped very Open the hood, and check the oil battery is not being charged.
low or lost pressure. Serious engine level (see page 201). An engine Immediately turn off all electrical
damage is possible, and you should very low on oil can lose pressure accessories. Try not to use other
take immediate action. during cornering and other driving electrically operated controls such as
maneuvers. the power windows. Keep the engine
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the running; starting the engine will
level back to the full mark on the discharge the battery rapidly.
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical dipstick (see page 253). Go to a service station or garage
damage almost immediately. Turn off 4. Start the engine, and watch the oil where you can get technical
the engine as soon as you can safely get pressure indicator. If it does not go assistance.

the vehicle stopped. out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
311).
303
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If this indicator comes on If the indicator comes on repeatedly, Readiness Codes

while driving, it means one even though it may go off as you Your vehicle has certain readiness
of the engine's emissions control continue driving, have your vehicle codes that are part of the on-board
systems may have a problem. Even checked by a dealer as soon as diagnostics for the emissions
though you may feel no difference in possible. systems. In some states, part of the
your vehicle's performance, it can emissions testing is to make sure
reduce your fuel economy and cause these codes are set. If they are not
increased emissions. Continued set, the test cannot be completed.
operation may cause serious damage. If you keep driving with the malfunction If the battery in your vehicle has
If you have recently refueled your indicator lamp on, you can damage been disconnected or gone dead,
vehicle, the indicator coming on your vehicle's emissions controls and these codes are erased. It can take
could be due to a loose or missing engine. Those repairs may not be several days of driving under various
fuel fill cap. You will also see a covered by your vehicle's warranties. conditions to set the codes again.
CHECK FUEL CAP message on To check if they are set, turn the
the information display. Tighten the If your vehicle has an automatic ignition switch to the ON (II)
cap until it clicks at least once. transmission, the malfunction position, without starting the engine.
Tightening the cap will not turn the indicator lamp may also come on The malfunction indicator lamp will
indicator off immediately; it can take with the D indicator. come on for 20 seconds. If it then
several days of normal driving. goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for an emissions
test until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to Emissions Testing for
more information (see page 329).
304
Brake System Indicator
U.S. Canada However, if the brake pedal does not If the ABS indicator and the VSA
Brake System feel normal, you should take system indicator (if equipped) come
Indicator (Red) immediate action. A problem in one on with the brake system indicator,
part of the system's dual circuit have your vehicle inspected by your
The brake system indicator (red) design will still give you braking at dealer immediately.
normally comes on when you turn two wheels. You will feel the brake
the ignition switch to the ON (II) pedal go down much farther before
position, and as a reminder to check the vehicle begins to slow down, and
the parking brake. It will stay on if you will have to press harder on the
you do not fully release the parking pedal.
brake.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
If the brake system indicator (red) gear, and pull to the side of the road
comes on while driving, the brake when it is safe. Because of the long
fluid level is probably low. Press distance needed to stop, it is
lightly on the brake pedal to see if it hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
feels normal. If it does, check the

should have it towed and repaired as
brake fluid level the next time you soon as possible (see Emergency
stop at a service station (see page Towing on page 311).
261).
If you must drive the vehicle a short
If the fluid level is low, take your distance in this condition, drive
vehicle to a dealer, and have the slowly and carefully.
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads/shoes.
305
Fuses
INTERIOR INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD (On Battery)
FUSE LID FUSE LABEL

The vehicle's fuses are contained in The under-hood fuse box is on the
two fuse boxes. positive terminal of the battery.
The interior fuse box is behind the
fuse lid. To access it, pull the fuse lid
toward you.
306
Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses FUSE

If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, check for a
blown fuse first. Determine from the
chart on pages 309 and 310, or the
diagram on the fuse label, which fuse
or fuses control that device. Check
those fuses first, but check all the
fuses before deciding that a blown
fuse is the cause. Replace any blown
fuses, and check if the device works. BLOWN FUSE PULLER
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the 3. Check each of the large fuses in 4. Check all smaller fuses in the
headlights and all other the under-hood fuse box and the interior fuse box by pulling out
accessories are off. interior fuse box by looking each one with the fuse puller
through the top at the wire inside. provided in the interior fuse box.

2. On the under-hood fuse box,
remove the cover from the fuse
box. On the interior fuse box, pull
the fuse lid toward you.
CONTINUED
307
Fuses
BLOWN If you replace the blown fuse with a On vehicles without navigation system
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it If the radio fuse is removed, the
might blow out again. This does not audio system will disable itself. The
indicate anything wrong. Replace the next time you turn on the radio you
fuse with one of the correct rating as will see ENTER CODE in the
soon as you can. frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the code (see page
191).
When the audio system is disabled,
Replacing a fuse with one that has a the clock setting in the audio system
higher rating greatly increases the will be canceled. You will need to
chances of damaging the electrical reset the clock (see page 192).
5. Look for a blown wire inside the system. If you do not have a
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with replacement fuse with the proper rating On vehicles with navigation system
one of the spare fuses of the same for the circuit, install one with a lower The navigation system will also
rating or lower. rating. disable itself. The next time you turn
on the ignition switch, the system
If you cannot drive the vehicle will require you to enter ENTER
without fixing the problem, and you 6. If the replacement fuse of the same CODE before it can be used. Refer
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse rating blows in a short time, there to the navigation system manual.
of the same rating or a lower rating is probably a serious electrical
from one of the other circuits. Make problem in your vehicle. Leave the
sure you can do without that circuit blown fuse in that circuit and have
temporarily (such as the accessory your vehicle checked by a
power socket or radio). qualified technician.
308
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1 10 A Back Up 26 10 A LAF
2 (7.5 A) TPMS 27 (30 A) Door Lock Main
3 20 A Driver's Power Window 28 20 A Headlight Main
4 Not Used 29 10 A Small Light
5 10 A Back Up Light 30 30 A Main Fan Motor
6 10 A SRS 31 Not Used
7 (10 A) Transmission SOL 32 10 A Right Headlight Low Beam
8 7.5 A SRS 33 15 A IG Coil
9 (20 A) Fog Light 34 10 A Left Headlight Low Beam
10 7.5 A A/C 35 (15 A) Door Lock
11 7.5 A ABS/VSA 36 (15 A) Door Lock
12 10 A ACG 37 30 A ABS/VSA FSR
13 20 A ACC Socket 38 (15 A) Door Lock
14 7.5 A Key Lock/Radio 39 15 A IGP
15 7.5 A Daytime Running Light 40 Not Used
16 10 A Rear Wiper 41 Not Used
17 20 A Front Passenger's Power 42 Not Used

Window 43 (7.5 A) MG Clutch
18 20 A Rear Passenger's Side Power 44 7.5 A STS
Window
45 Not Used
19 20 A Rear Driver's Side Power
Window 46 Not Used
20 15 A Fuel Pump 47 (30 A) Sub Fan Motor
21 15 A Washer 48 10 A Left Headlight High Beam
22 7.5 A Meter 49 (15 A) Door Lock
23 10 A Hazard 50 (15 A) Door Lock
24 10 A Stop/Horn : If equipped
25 Not Used
CONTINUED
309
Fuse Locations
No. Amps. Circuits Protected UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX Under-hood Fuse Box (On the battery)
51 10 A Right Headlight High Beam Amps. Circuits Protected
52 15 A DBW 100 A Battery
53 Not Used 70 A EPS
54 20 A Rear Defogger 20 A Horn/Hazard
55 10 A Heated Mirror
56 30 A Front Wiper
57 30 A Blower Motor
58 30 A ABS/VSA Motor
59 20 A Rear Defogger
30 A
60 50 A/ IG Main/Option Main
40 A
61 30 A Radio
62 Not Used
: If equipped
310
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed, If, due to damage, your vehicle must
call a professional towing service or be towed with the front wheels on
organization. Never tow your vehicle the ground, do this: Improper towing preparation will
with just a rope or chain. It is very damage the transmission. Follow the
Manual transmission: above procedure exactly. If you cannot
dangerous.

Release the parking brake. shift the transmission or start the
There are two ways to tow your engine (automatic transmission), your
vehicle:
Shift the transmission to neutral. vehicle must be transported with the
Flat-bed Equipment The operator
Leave the ignition switch in the front wheels off the ground.
loads your vehicle on the back of a ACCESSORY (I) position so the
truck. This is the best way to steering wheel does not lock. With the front wheels on the ground,
transport your vehicle. it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
Automatic transmission:
Wheel-lift Equipment The tow than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
Release the parking brake. speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the front tires and lift them off Start the engine.

the ground. The rear tires remain on Shift to D position and hold for 5
the ground. This is an acceptable
seconds, then to N. Let the engine
way to tow your vehicle.
run for 3 minutes, then turn it off.

Turn off the engine.

Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
CONTINUED
311
Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the mud, or snow, call a towing service to
bumpers will cause serious damage. pull it out (see page 311).
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle's weight. For very short distances, such as
freeing the vehicle, you can use the
detachable towing hook that mounts
on the anchor in the front bumper.
The steering system can be damaged if

the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) To use the towing hook:
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns freely before you begin 1. Take the towing hook and the
towing. extension out of the tool kit in the
cargo area.
2. Put a cloth on the notch of the
cover. Using the extension,
carefully pry on the notch of the
cover to remove it.
312
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use

the towing hook for straight, flat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. The tow hook should not be used
to tow the vehicle onto a flat bed. Do
not use it as a tie down.
3. Screw the towing hook into the

bolt hole behind the bumper, then
tighten the hook securely with the
extension.

313
314
The diagrams in this section give you Identification Numbers ............... 316 Three Way Catalytic
the dimensions and capacities of Specifications .............................. 318 Converter ................................ 328
your vehicle and the locations of the DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Emissions Testing....................... 329
identification numbers. It also Vehicles) ............................. 321
includes information you should Uniform Tire Quality
know about your vehicle's tires and Grading ............................... 321
emissions control systems. Treadwear ............................... 321
Traction .................................. 321
Temperature ........................... 322
Tire Labeling .............................. 323
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Required Federal
Explanation ......................... 324
Emissions Controls ..................... 326
The Clean Air Act.................... 326
Crankcase Emissions Control
System ................................ 326
Evaporative Emissions Control
System ................................ 326
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ............................. 326
Exhaust Emissions
Controls .............................. 327
Replacement Parts .................. 327
315
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying

numbers in various places. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver's side. It is
also on the certification label COVER
attached to the driver's doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
The VIN is also located on the
engine bulkhead. Slide the cover on
the engine compartment bulkhead to
view the VIN. Always close the cover
when finished.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
316
Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into

the front of the engine block.
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
ENGINE NUMBER
TRANSMISSION NUMBER
317
Specifications
Dimensions Engine
Length 161.6 in (4,105 mm) Type Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC
Width 66.7 in (1,695 mm) i-VTEC 4-cylinder gasoline engine
Height 60.0 in (1,525 mm) Bore x Stroke 2.87 x 3.52 in
(73.0 x 89.4 mm)
Wheelbase 98.4 in (2,500 mm)
Displacement 91.3 cu-in (1,497 cm3)
Track Front 58.7 in (1,492 mm)1
58.1 in (1,476 mm)2 Compression ratio 10.4 : 1
Rear 58.1 in (1,475 mm) 1 Spark plugs IZFR6K13 (NGK)
57.4 in (1,459 mm)2 SKJ20DR-M13 (DENSO)
1: All models except Sport
2: Sport model
Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label
attached to the driver's
doorjamb.
Seating Capacities
Total 5
Front 2
Rear 3
318
Specifications
Capacities Air Conditioning

Fuel tank Approx. Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a)
10.6 US gal (40 L) Charge quantity 13.114.8 oz
Engine oil Change1 (370420 g)
Including 3.8 US qt (3.6 L) Lubricant type SP-10
filter Lights
Without 3.6 US qt (3.4 L) Headlights High/Low 12 V 60/55 W (HB2)
filter
Front turn signal lights 12 V 21 W (Amber)
Total 4.4 US qt (4.2 L)
Parking lights/side marker lights 12 V 3.8 W (Amber)
Engine Automatic
Fog lights 12 V 55 W (H11)
coolant transmission
Rear turn signal lights 12 V 21 W (Amber)
Change2 1.19 US gal (4.5 L)
Stop/Taillights 12 V 21/5 W
Total 1.32 US gal (5.0 L)
Back-up lights 12 V 16 W
Manual
transmission License plate lights 12 V 5 W
Change2 1.16 US gal (4.4 L) Ceiling light 12 V 8 W
Total 1.29 US gal (4.9 L) Cargo area light 12 V 5 W
Automatic Change 2.6 US qt (2.5 L) Map light 12 V 8 W
transmission Total 6.18 US qt (5.85 L) High-mount brake light LED
fluid
: For some types
Manual Change 1.6 US qt (1.5 L)
transmission Total 1.7 US qt (1.6 L)
fluid
Windshield U.S. Vehicles 2.6 US qt (2.5 L)
washer Canada Vehicles 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)
reservoir
1: Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
2: Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
0.116 US gal (0.44 L)
319
Specifications
Battery Tires
Capacity 12 V 32 AH/5 HR Size Front/Rear 175/65R15 84S1
12 V 34 AH/5 HR 185/55R16 83H2
12 V 40 AH/20 HR
Spare T125/70D15 95M3
Fuses T135/80D15 99M4
Interior See page 309 or the fuse label Pressure Front/Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)1
attached to the dashboard.
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)2
Under-hood See page 310 or the fuse box
Spare 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
cover.
1: All models except Sport
Alignment
2: Sport model
Toe-in Front 0.0 in (0 mm)
3: On models without VSA system and all Canadian models with
Rear 0.10 in (2.5 mm)
manual transmission
Camber Front 0
4: On models with VSA system
Rear 1
Caster Front 320'
320
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all Treadwear Traction

U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. The treadwear grade is a The traction grades, from highest to
All tires are also graded for comparative rating based on the wear lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
treadwear, traction, and temperature rate of the tire when tested under grades represent the tire's ability to
performance according to controlled conditions on a specified stop on wet pavement as measured
Department of Transportation (DOT) government test course. For under controlled conditions on
standards. The following explains example, a tire graded 150 would specified government test surfaces of
these gradings. wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
Uniform Tire Quality Grading as well on the government course as C may have poor traction
Quality grades can be found where a tire graded 100. The relative performance.
applicable on the tire sidewall performance of tires depends upon
Warning: The traction grade
between tread shoulder and the actual conditions of their use,
assigned to this tire is based on
maximum section width. For however, and may depart
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
example: significantly from the norm due to
and does not include acceleration,
Treadwear 200 variations in driving habits, service
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
Traction AA practices and differences in road
traction characteristics.
Temperature A characteristics and climate.
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
321
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature Warning: The temperature grade for

The temperature grades are A (the this tire is established for a tire that
highest), B, and C, representing the is properly inflated and not
tire's resistance to the generation of overloaded. Excessive speed,
heat and its ability to dissipate heat underinflation, or excessive loading,
when tested under controlled either separately or in combination,
conditions on a specified indoor can cause heat buildup and possible
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tire failure.
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
322
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle Tire Size Tire Identification Number (TIN)
have a number of markings. Those Whenever tires are replaced, they The tire identification number (TIN)
you should be aware of are described should be replaced with tires of the is a group of numbers and letters that
below. same size. Below is an example of look like the following example. TIN
tire size with an explanation of what is located on the sidewall of the tire.
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE each component means.
(1) DOT B97R FW6X 2202
185/55R16 83H DOT This indicates that the tire
185 Tire width in millimeters. meets all requirements of
55 Aspect ratio (the tire's the U.S. Department of
section height as a Transportation.
percentage of its width). B97R Manufacturer's
R Tire construction code (R identification mark.
indicates radial). FW6X Tire type code.
16 Rim diameter in inches. 2202 Date of manufacture.
83 Load index (a numerical code Year
associated with the Week
maximum load the tire can
carry).
(4) (1)
H Speed symbol (an
(3) (2) alphabetical code indicating
(1) Tire Size the maximum speed rating).
(2) Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(3) Maximum Tire Pressure
(4) Maximum Tire Load
CONTINUED
323
Tire Labeling, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
Glossary of Tire Terminology Tire Pressure Monitoring System As an added safety feature, your
Cold Tire Pressure - The tire air (TPMS) Required Federal vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure when the vehicle has been Explanation pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
parked for at least three hours or U.S. models only that illuminates a low tire pressure
driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Each tire, including the spare (if telltale
provided), should be checked
Load Rating - Means the maximum
monthly when cold and inflated to
load that a tire is rated to carry for a
the inflation pressure recommended
given inflation presure. when one or more of your tires is
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
Maximum Inflation Pressure - the vehicle placard or tire inflation significantly under-inflated.
maximum tire air pressure that the pressure label. Accordingly, when the low tire
tire can hold. pressure telltale illuminates, you
(If your vehicle has tires of a different
Maximum Load Rating - Means the size than the size indicated on the should stop and check your tires as
load rating for a tire at the maximum vehicle placard or tire inflation soon as possible, and inflate them to
permissible inflation pressure for that pressure label, you should determine the proper pressure.
tire. the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
Recommended Inflation Pressure -
The cold tire inflation pressure
recommended by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) - Means
the projections within the principal
grooves designed to give a visual
indication of the degrees of wear of
the tread.
324
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
Driving on a significantly under- Your vehicle has also been equipped Always check the TPMS malfunction
inflated tire causes the tire to with a TPMS malfunction indicator to telltale after replacing one or more
overheat and can lead to tire failure. indicate when the system is not tires or wheels on your vehicle to
Under-inflation also reduces fuel operating properly. The TPMS ensure that the replacement or
efficiency and tire tread life, and may malfunction indicator is provided by alternate tires and wheels allow the
affect the vehicle's handling and a separate telltale, which displays the TPMS to continue to function
stopping ability. symbol TPMS when illuminated. properly.
Please note that the TPMS is not a When the malfunction indicator is
substitute for proper tire illuminated,
maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger the system may not be able to detect
illumination of the TPMS low tire or signal low tire pressure as
pressure telltale. intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
325
Emissions Controls

The burning of gasoline in your In Canada, Honda vehicles comply Evaporative Emissions Control
vehicle's engine produces several with the Canadian emission System
byproducts. Some of these are requirements, as specified in an As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of agreement with Environment tank, an evaporative emissions
nitrogen (NOx), and hydrocarbons Canada, at the time they are control canister filled with charcoal
(HC). Gasoline evaporating from the manufactured. adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
tank also produces hydrocarbons. Crankcase Emissions Control canister while the engine is off. After
Controlling the production of NOx, System the engine is started and warmed up,
CO, and HC is important to the Your vehicle has a positive crankcase the vapor is drawn into the engine
environment. Under certain ventilation system. This keeps and burned during driving.
conditions of sunlight and climate, gasses that build up in the engine's Onboard Refueling Vapor
NOx and HC react to form crankcase from going into the Recovery
photochemical smog. Carbon atmosphere. The positive crankcase The onboard refueling vapor
monoxide does not contribute to ventilation valve routes them from recovery (ORVR) system captures
smog creation, but it is a poisonous the crankcase back to the intake the fuel vapors during refueling. The
gas. manifold. They are then drawn into vapors are adsorbed in a canister
The Clean Air Act the engine and burned. filled with activated carbon. While
The United States Clean Air Act driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
sets standards for automobile into the engine and burned off.
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
work and what to do to maintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
326
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls PGM-FI System Three Way Catalytic Converter

The exhaust emissions controls The PGM-FI system uses sequential The three way catalytic converter is
include four systems: PGM-FI, multiport fuel injection. It has three in the exhaust system. Through
ignition timing control, exhaust gas subsystems: air intake, engine chemical reactions, it converts HC,
recirculation, and three way catalytic control, and fuel control. The CO, and NOx in the engine's exhaust
converter. These four systems work powertrain control module (PCM) in to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
together to control the engine's automatic transmission vehicles or (N2), and water vapor.
combustion and minimize the the engine control module (ECM) in
manual transmission vehicles uses Replacement Parts
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that The emissions control systems are
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust various sensors to determine how
much air is going into the engine. It designed and certified to work
emissions control systems are together in reducing emissions to
separate from the crankcase and then controls how much fuel to inject
under all operating conditions. levels that comply with the Clean Air
evaporative emissions control Act. To make sure the emissions
systems. Ignition Timing Control System remain low, you should use only new
This system constantly adjusts the
Honda replacement parts or their
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced. equivalent for repairs. Using lower
quality parts may increase the
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) emissions from your vehicle.
System
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) The emissions control systems are
system takes some of the exhaust gas covered by warranties separate from
and routes it back into the intake the rest of your vehicle. Read your
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the warranty manual for more
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount information.
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
327
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter Keep the engine well maintained.
contains precious metals that serve Have your vehicle diagnosed and
as catalysts, promoting chemical
repaired if it is misfiring,
reactions to convert the exhaust
backfiring, stalling, or otherwise
gasses without affecting the metals.
not running properly.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
The three way catalytic converter THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take A defective three way catalytic
place. It can set on fire any converter contributes to air pollution,
combustible materials that come and can impair your engine's
near it. Park your vehicle away from performance. Follow these
high grass, dry leaves, or other guidelines to protect your vehicle's
flammables. three way catalytic converter.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
328
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes If the testing facility determines that 4. Without touching the accelerator
If you take your vehicle for an the readiness codes are not set, you pedal, start the engine, and let it
emissions test shortly after the will be requested to return at a later idle for 20 seconds.
battery has been disconnected or date to complete the test. If you must
5. Keep the vehicle in Park
gone dead, it may not pass the test. get the vehicle retested within the
(automatic transmission) or
This is because of certain readiness next two or three days, you can
neutral (manual transmission).
codes that must be set in the on- condition the vehicle for retesting by
Increase the engine speed to 2,000
board diagnostics for the emissions doing the following.
rpm, and hold it there until the
systems. These codes are erased
1. Make sure the gas tank is nearly, temperature gauge rises to at least
when the battery is disconnected,
but not completely, full (around 1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).
and set again only after several days
3/4).
of driving under a variety of 6. Without touching the accelerator
conditions. 2. Make sure the vehicle has been pedal, let the engine idle for 20
parked with the engine off for 6 seconds.
hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40 and
95F.
CONTINUED
329
Emissions Testing
7. Select a nearby lightly traveled 8. Then drive in city/suburban traffic

major highway where you can for at least 10 minutes. When
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph traffic conditions allow, let the
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 vehicle coast for several seconds
minutes. Drive on the highway in without using the accelerator pedal
D (automatic) or 5th (manual). Do or the brake pedal.
not use the cruise control. When
9. Make sure the vehicle has been
traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds
parked with the engine off for 30
without moving the accelerator
minutes.
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot If the testing facility determines the
do this for a continuous 90 readiness codes are still not set, see
seconds because of traffic your dealer.
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).
330
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service Information .... 332

Warranty Coverages ................... 333
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Vehicles) ................................. 334
Authorized Manuals .................... 335

331
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
trained professionals. They should Customer Relations us this information:
be able to answer all your questions. Honda Canada Inc. Vehicle Identification Number (see
If you encounter a problem that your page 316)
dealership does not solve to your Visit www.honda.ca for contact
satisfaction, please discuss it with the information
Name and address of the dealer
dealership's management. The Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 who services your vehicle
service manager or general manager Fax: 1-877-939-0909
Date of purchase
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way. In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin

Odometer reading of your vehicle
If you are dissatisfied with the Islands: Your name, address, and
decision made by the dealership's Bella International telephone number
management, contact Honda P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816 A detailed description of the
Customer Service. problem
U.S. Owners: Tel: (787) 620-7546
Name of the dealer who sold the
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service vehicle to you
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
332
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Seat Belt Limited Warranty a seat Replacement Battery Limited
Your new vehicle is covered by these belt that fails to function properly is Warranty provides prorated
warranties: covered by a limited warranty. Please coverage for a replacement battery
read your warranty booklet for purchased from your dealer.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
details.

covers your new vehicle, except for Replacement Muffler Lifetime
the battery, emissions control Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Limited Warranty provides
systems, and accessories against all exterior body panels are covered coverage for as long as the purchaser
defects in materials and for rust-through from the inside for of the muffler owns the vehicle.
workmanship. the specified time period with no
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
mileage limit.
Emissions Control Systems Defects all these warranties. Please read the
Warranty and Emissions Accessory Limited Warranty 2010 Honda warranty information
Performance Warranty these two Honda accessories are covered booklet that came with your vehicle
warranties cover your vehicle's under this warranty. Time and for precise information on warranty
emissions control systems. Time, mileage limits depend on the type of coverages. Your vehicle's original
mileage, and coverage are accessory and other factors. Please tires are covered by their
conditional. Please read your read your warranty booklet for manufacturer. Tire warranty
warranty booklet for exact details. information is in a separate booklet.
information.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty Canadian Owners
Original Equipment Battery Limited covers all Honda replacement Please refer to the 2010 warranty
Warranty this warranty gives up to parts against defects in materials and manual that came with your vehicle.
100% credit toward a replacement workmanship.
battery.
333
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a If NHTSA receives similar To contact NHTSA, you may call the
defect which could cause a crash or complaints, it may open an Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
could cause injury or death, you investigation, and if it finds that a 1-888-327-4236
should immediately inform the safety defect exists in a group of (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
National Highway Traffic Safety vehicles, it may order a recall and http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administration (NHTSA) in addition remedy campaign. However, NHTSA Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
to notifying American Honda Motor cannot become involved in individual Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC
Co., Inc. problems between you, your dealer, 20590. You can also obtain other
or American Honda Motor Co., Inc. information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
334
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) Service Manual:

The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online: repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Go online at www. helminc. com
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
at 1-800-782-4356. troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit in
your vehicle.
Publication Form Description
Form Number Body Repair Manual:
61TK610 2010 Honda Fit Service Manual Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
61TK601EL 2010 Honda Fit of damaged body parts.
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
61TK630 2009 Honda Fit Body Repair Manual
31TK6610 2010 Honda Fit Owner's Manual
31TK6810 2010 Honda Fit Navigation System Owner's Manual
31TK6M10 2010 Honda Fit Honda Service History
31TK6Q10 2010 Honda Fit Technology Reference Guide
HON-R Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
335
336
Index
A Auto Door Unlocking ................... 85 Belts, Seat ................................ 8, 18

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ... 20 Beverage Holders ...................... 106
Accessories and Automatic Speed Control ........... 194 Booster Seats ............................... 50
Modifications .......................... 206 Automatic Transmission ............ 219 Brakes
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key Capacity, Fluid ........................ 319 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ........... 231
Position) ................................... 80 Checking Fluid Level .............. 259 Break-in, New Linings ............. 198
Accessory Power Socket ............ 106 Paddle Shifters ........................ 224 Bulb Replacement ................... 266
Additives, Engine Oil ................. 254 Shifting ................................... 219 Fluid ....................................... 261
Adjusting the Steering Wheel ...... 77 Shift Lever Position Parking ................................... 102
Advanced Airbags ........................ 27 Indicators ............................ 219 System Design ........................ 230
Airbag (SRS) ............................ 9, 22 Shift Lever Positions ............... 220 System Indicator ............... 60, 305
Air Conditioning System ............ 110 Shift Lock Release ................... 223 Wear Indicators ....................... 230
Usage ...................................... 112 Automatic Transmission Fluid ... 259 Braking System .......................... 230
Air Pressure, Tires .............. 273, 274 Auxiliary Input Jack ................... 190 Break-in, New Vehicle ................ 198
Alcohol in Gasoline .................... 198 Average Fuel Economy ................ 70 Brightness Control,
Antifreeze ................................... 256 Instruments .............................. 76
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) B
Indicator Light .................. 62, 231
Operation ................................ 231 Battery
Anti-theft, Audio System ............. 191 Charging System
INDEX
Anti-theft Steering Column Indicator ........................ 60, 303
Lock ......................................... 80 Jump Starting .......................... 299
Audio Antenna ........................... 268 Maintenance ........................... 279
Auto Door Locking ....................... 83 Specifications .......................... 320
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .... 83 Before Driving ........................... 197
CONTINUED
I
Index
Bulb Replacement CD Player ........................... 122, 149 Child Seats ............................. 34, 41
Back-up Lights ........................ 266 Ceiling Light .............................. 107 LATCH Anchorage Points ........ 43
Brake Lights ........................... 266 Certification Label ...................... 316 Tether Anchorage Points ......... 47
Fog Lights ............................... 265 Chains, Tires .............................. 278 Cleaning the Seat Belts .............. 267
Front Parking Lights ............... 263 Changing a Flat Tire .................. 285 Clock .......................................... 192
Front Side Marker Lights ........ 263 Changing Oil Clutch Fluid ............................... 261
Front Turn Signal Lights ......... 264 How to .................................... 254 Code, Audio System ................... 191
Headlights .............................. 262 When to .................................. 245 CO in the Exhaust ................ 53, 326
Rear Bulbs .............................. 266 Charging System Cold Weather, Starting in ........... 216
Specifications .......................... 319 Indicator ........................... 60, 303 Compact Spare Tire .................... 284
Taillights ................................. 266 Check Fuel Cap Indicator ............. 70 Controls, Instruments and ............ 57
Turn Signal Lights .......... 263, 266 Checklist, Before Driving ........... 215 Coolant
Bulbs, Halogen .......................... 262 Childproof Door Locks ................. 82 Adding .................................... 256
Child Safety .................................. 34 Checking ................................ 202
C Booster Seats ........................... 50 Proper Solution ....................... 256
Child Seats .................... 39, 40, 41 Temperature Indicator ............. 63
Capacities Chart ......................... 319 Important Safety Reminders ..... 38 Crankcase Emissions Control
Carbon Monoxide Hazard ............ 53 Infants ...................................... 39 System ................................... 326
Cargo ......................................... 208 Larger Children ....................... 49 Cruise Control Indicator ............... 65
Cargo Hook ................................ 212 LATCH ..................................... 43 Cruise Control Operation ........... 194
Cargo, How to Carry .................. 208 Risks with Airbags ................... 35 Cruise Main Indicator .................. 65
Carrying Cargo .......................... 208 Small Children ......................... 40 Cup Holders ............................... 106
CAUTION, Explanation of ............ iii Tethers .................................... 47 Customer Service ....................... 332
CD Care ..................................... 186 Warning Labels ........................ 36
CD Error Messages ............ 128, 157 Where Should a Child Sit? ........ 35
II
Index
D Doors Brake System Indicator ..... 60, 305

Auto Door Locking/ Changing a Flat Tire ............... 285
DANGER, Explanation of ............. iii Unlocking ............................. 83 Charging System
Dashboard ............................... 3, 58 Childproof Door Locks ............. 82 Indicator ........................ 60, 303
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Locking and Unlocking ............ 81 Checking the Fuses ................ 307
only) ......................................... 75 Power Door Locks ................... 81 Driving with a Flat Tire ........... 284
Daytime Running Lights DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 76
Indicator ................................... 65 Vehicles) ................................ 321 Jump Starting .......................... 299
Dead Battery .............................. 299 Downshifting, Manual Low Oil Pressure
Defects, Reporting Safety (U.S. Transmission .......................... 217 Indicator ........................ 60, 303
only) ....................................... 334 Driver and Passenger Safety .......... 5 Malfunction Indicator
Defogger, Rear Window ............... 76 Driving ....................................... 213 Lamp ............................. 60, 304
Defrosting the Windows ............ 113 Economy ................................. 203 Overheated Engine ................. 301
Detachable Anchor ...................... 99 Driving Guidelines ..................... 214 Towing .................................... 311
Dimensions ................................ 318 Driving with the Paddle Shifters Emergency Brake ...................... 102
Dimming the Headlights .............. 74 (Sport only) ............................ 224 Emergency Flashers .................... 76
Dipstick Dust and Pollen Filter ................ 268 Emergency Towing .................... 311
Automatic Transmission ......... 259 Emissions Controls .................... 326
Engine Oil ............................... 201 E Emissions Testing ...................... 329
Directional Signals ................. 63, 74
INDEX
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ....... 230 Economy, Fuel ........................... 203
Disc Care ................................... 186 Electric Power Steering (EPS)
Disc Player Error Indicator ................................... 62
Messages ........................ 128, 157 Emergencies on the Road .......... 283
Disposal of Used Oil ................... 255 Battery, Jump Starting ............. 299
CONTINUED
III
Index
Engine F Fill Door and Cap .................... 199

Adding Engine Coolant ........... 256 Gauge ...................................... 70
Coolant Temperature Fan, Interior ............................... 111 Low Fuel Indicator ................... 62
Indicator ............................... 63 Features ..................................... 109 Octane Requirement ............... 198
If it Won't Start ........................ 297 Filters Reserve Indicator ..................... 62
Malfunction Indicator Dust and Pollen ....................... 268 Tank, Filling the ...................... 199
Lamp ............................. 60, 304 Oil ........................................... 254 Fuel Economy ............................ 203
Oil Life Indicator ..................... 245 Flashers, Hazard Warning ........... 76 Fuses, Checking the .................. 307
Oil Pressure Indicator ....... 60, 303 Flat Tire, Changing a ................. 285
Oil, What Kind to Use ............. 253 Floor Mats ................................. 267 G
Overheating ............................ 301 Fluids
Specifications .......................... 318 Automatic Transmission ......... 259 Gas Mileage, Improving ............. 204
Speed Limiter .................. 218, 222 Brake ...................................... 261 Gasoline ..................................... 198
Starting ................................... 216 Clutch ..................................... 261 Low Fuel Indicator ................... 62
Engine Coolant .......................... 256 Location .................................. 252 Octane Requirement ............... 198
Engine Number ......................... 317 Manual Transmission .............. 260 Tank, Refueling ....................... 199
Ethanol in Gasoline .................... 198 Windshield Washer ................. 258 Gas Station Procedures .............. 199
Evaporative Emissions FM/AM Radio Reception ........... 184 Gauges
Controls .................................. 326 Four-way Flashers ........................ 76 Fuel .......................................... 70
Exhaust Emissions Controls ...... 327 Front Airbags ........................... 9, 25 Odometer ................................. 70
Exhaust Fumes ............................ 53 Front Seat Speedometer ............................ 68
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat Adjusting .................................. 93 Tachometer .............................. 68
Belts by .................................... 16 Fuel ............................................ 198 Gearshift Lever Positions
Check Fuel Cap Indicator ......... 70 Automatic
Economy ................................. 203 Transmission ............... 219, 220
IV
Index
Manual Transmission .............. 217 High-Low Beam Switch ................ 74 DRL (Daytime Running
Glove Box .................................. 105 Hood, Opening and Closing Lights) .................................. 65
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating the .......................................... 200 Electric Power Steering ............ 62
(GVWR) ................................. 210 Horn ........................................ 4, 72 Fog Lights ................................ 64
Hydraulic Clutch ........................ 261 High Beam ............................... 65
H High Temperature ................... 63
I Key (Immobilizer System) ....... 66
Halogen Headlight Bulbs ........... 262 Lights On ................................. 64
Hazard Warning Flashers ............ 76 Identification Number, Low Fuel .................................. 62
Headlights ............................. 74, 75 Vehicle ................................... 316 Low Oil Pressure .............. 60, 303
Aiming .................................... 262 Ignition Low Temperature ..................... 63
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Keys ......................................... 78 Low Tire Pressure ............. 64, 235
only) ..................................... 75 Switch ...................................... 80 Maintenance Minder ......... 66, 245
High Beam Indicator ................ 65 Timing Control System ........... 327 Malfunction Indicator
High Beams, Turning on .......... 74 Immobilizer System ..................... 79 Lamp ............................. 60, 304
Lights On Indicator .................. 64 Important Safety Precautions ......... 6 Passenger Airbag Off ............... 31
Low Beams, Turning on ........... 74 Indicators, Instrument Panel ........ 59 Seat Belt Reminder ............. 18, 60
Reminder Chime ................. 74, 75 ABS (Anti-lock Brake) ....... 62, 231 Security System ....................... 66
Replacing Halogen Bulbs ........ 262 Brake (Parking and Brake Side Airbag Off .................... 31, 61
Turning on ............................... 74 System) ......................... 60, 305 SRS ..................................... 30, 61
INDEX
Head Restraints ............................ 94 Charging System .............. 60, 303 TPMS ................................ 64, 236
Heated Mirror ............................ 102 Check Fuel Cap ....................... 70 Turn Signal and Hazard
Heating and Cooling .................. 110 Cruise Control .......................... 65 Warning ............................... 63
High Altitude, Starting at ............ 216 Cruise Main ............................. 65 VSA Off .................................... 67
High Beam Lever ......................... 75 Door and Tailgate Open ........... 62 VSA System ............................. 67
CONTINUED
V
Index
Washer Level ........................... 65 K Low Coolant Level ...................... 202

Infant Restraint ............................ 39 Lower Anchors ............................. 43
Infant Seats .................................. 39 Keys ............................................. 78 Lower Glove Box ........................ 105
Tether Anchorage Point ........... 47 Low Fuel Indicator ....................... 62
Inflation, Proper Tire .................. 273 L Low Oil Pressure
Recommended Pressures ....... 274 Indicator ........................... 60, 303
Inside Mirror ............................. 101 Lubricant Specifications Chart ... 319
Inspection, Tire .......................... 275 Label, Certification ..................... 316 Luggage, Storing (cargo) ........... 208
Installing a Child Seat .................. 42 Lane Change, Signaling ............... 74
Instant Fuel Economy .................. 70 Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 14, 19
LATCH Anchorage System .......... 43 M
Instrument Panel .......................... 59
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 76 Lights
Bulb Replacement ................... 262 Maintenance .............................. 243
Instruments and Controls ............. 57 Main Items and Sub Items ...... 248
Interior Lights ............................ 107 Indicator ................................... 59
Interior .................................... 107 Minder .................................... 245
Ceiling Light ........................... 107 Minder Indicator ...................... 66
Introduction ................................... i Parking .................................... 74
Turn Signal .............................. 74 Owner's Maintenance
iPod Error Messages ......... 135, 176 Checks ................................ 250
Load Limit .................................. 209
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ...... 80 Safety ...................................... 244
J Locks Schedule ................................. 251
Anti-theft Steering Column ....... 80 Malfunction Indicator
Jacking up the Vehicle ............... 285 Childproof Door ....................... 82 Lamp ................................ 60, 304
Jack, Tire ................................... 285 Fuel Fill Door .......................... 199 Manual Transmission ................. 217
Jump Starting ............................. 299 Lockout Prevention .................. 82 Checking Fluid Level .............. 260
Power Door .............................. 81 Shifting ................................... 217
Tailgate .................................... 88 Manual Transmission Fluid ....... 260
VI
Index
Meters, Gauges ............................ 68 Pressure Indicator ............. 60, 303 Playing a Disc ..................... 122, 149
Methanol in Gasoline ................. 198 Selecting Proper Viscosity Playing an iPod .................. 129, 170
Mirrors, Adjusting ...................... 101 Chart ................................... 253 Playing a PC card ....................... 158
Modifications ............................. 207 Onboard Refueling Vapor Playing a USB Flash Memory
Modifying Your Vehicle ............. 207 Recovery ................................ 326 Device ............................. 136, 177
ON (Ignition Key Position) .......... 80 Playing the AM/FM Radio ......... 143
N Outside Mirrors ......................... 101 Playing the FM/AM Radio ......... 115
Overheating, Engine .................. 301 Pollen Filter ............................... 268
Neutral Gear Position ................. 221 Owner's Maintenance Checks .... 250 Power Door Locks ....................... 81
New Vehicle Break-in ................. 198 Oxygenated Fuels ...................... 198 Power Socket Location ............... 106
Normal Shift Speeds .................. 218 Power Windows ......................... 100
NOTICE, Explanation of ................ i P Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts ........ 16
Numbers, Identification ............. 316 Preparing to Drive ...................... 215
Paddle Shifters ........................... 224 Proper Seat Belt Usage ................ 14
Panel Brightness Control ............. 76 Protecting Adults and Teens ........ 11
O Additional Safety Precautions ... 17
Park Gear Position ..................... 220
Parking ...................................... 229 Advice for Pregnant Women .... 16
Octane Requirement,
Parking Brake ............................ 102 Protecting Children ...................... 34
Gasoline ................................. 198 General Guidelines .................. 34
Odometer ..................................... 70 Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator ........................... 60, 305 Protecting Infants ..................... 39
INDEX
Odometer, Trip ............................ 69 Protecting Larger Children ...... 49
Parking Lights ............................. 74
Oil
Parking Over Things that Protecting Small Children ........ 40
Change, How to ...................... 254 Using Child Seats with
Change, When to .................... 245 Burn ................................ 229, 328
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .... 31 Tethers ................................. 47
Checking Engine .................... 201 Using LATCH .......................... 43
Life, Engine ............................. 245 PGM-FI System .......................... 327
CONTINUED
VII
Index
R Wiper Blades .......................... 269 Seat Belts ................................. 8, 18

Replacing Seat Belts After a Additional Information ............. 18
Radiator Overheating ................. 301 Crash ........................................ 20 Advice for Pregnant Women .... 16
Radio/Disc Sound System ......... 143 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Automatic Seat Belt
Radio Theft Protection ............... 191 Vehicles) ................................ 334 Tensioners ........................... 20
Readiness Codes ........................ 329 Reserve Tank, Engine Cleaning .................................. 267
Rear Lights, Bulb Coolant ............................ 202, 256 Detachable Anchor .................. 99
Replacement ........................... 266 Restraint, Child ............................ 34 Lap/Shoulder Belt .............. 14, 19
Rearview Mirror ......................... 101 Reverse Gear Position ................ 221 Maintenance ............................ 20
Rear Window Defogger ................ 76 Reverse Lockout ........................ 217 Reminder Indicator and
Rear Window Wiper and Rotation, Tire ............................. 276 Beeper ............................. 18, 60
Washer ..................................... 73 System Components ................ 18
Recommended Shift Speeds ....... 218 S Use During Pregnancy ............. 16
Refueling .................................... 199 Wearing a Lap/Shoulder
Reminder Indicators ..................... 60 Safety Belts .............................. 8, 18 Belt .................................. 14, 19
Remote Audio Controls .............. 189 Safety Defects, Reporting (U.S. Seats ............................................ 93
Remote Transmitter ..................... 90 only) ....................................... 334 Seats, Adjusting the ..................... 93
Replacement Information Safety Features .............................. 7 Seat Under Box .......................... 106
Dust and Pollen Filter ............. 268 Airbags ................................. 9, 22 Security System ......................... 193
Engine Oil and Filter ............... 254 Door Locks .............................. 11 Security System Indicator ............ 66
Fuses ...................................... 306 Head Restraints ........................ 13 Sensors
Light Bulbs ............................. 262 Seat Belts ........................ 8, 14, 18 Driver's Seat Position Sensor ... 27
Schedule ................................. 251 Seats & Seat-Backs .............. 11, 12 Front Passenger's Weight
Spark Plugs ............................. 318 Safety Labels, Location of ............. 54 Sensors ................................ 27
Tires ....................................... 276 Safety Messages .......................... iii Impact Sensors ................... 22, 23
Serial Number ............................ 316
VIII
Index
Service Intervals ......................... 245 Speedometer ................................ 68 Sun Visor ................................... 106
Service Manual (U.S. only) ........ 335 SRS, Additional Information ......... 22 Supplemental Restraint
Service Station Procedures ........ 199 Additional Safety Precautions ... 33 System .............................. 9, 22
Setting the Clock ........................ 192 Airbag Service .......................... 32 Servicing .................................. 32
Shifting the Automatic Airbag System Components ..... 22 SRS Indicator ...................... 30, 61
Transmission .......................... 219 How the Side Airbag Off System Components ................ 22
Shift Lever Position Indicators ... 219 Indicator Works ................... 31 Synthetic Oil .............................. 254
Shift Lock Release ...................... 223 How the SRS Indicator Works .. 30
Side Airbags ................................. 28 How Your Front Airbags T
How the Side Airbag Off Work .................................... 25
Indicator Works ................... 31 How Your Side Airbags Work .. 28 Tachometer .................................. 68
How Your Side Airbags Work .. 28 How Your Side Curtain Airbags Tailgate ........................................ 88
Side Curtain Airbags .................... 30 Work .................................... 30 Open Indicator ......................... 62
How Your Side Curtain Airbags SRS Indicator ......................... 30, 61 Opening the ............................. 88
Work .................................... 30 START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 80 Taillights, Changing Bulbs in ..... 266
Side Marker Lights, Bulb Starting the Engine .................... 216 Taking Care of the
Replacement in ....................... 263 In Cold Weather at High Unexpected ............................ 283
Signaling Turns ............................ 63 Altitude ................................ 216
Snow Tires ................................. 278 With a Dead Battery ................ 299
Spare Tire .................................. 284 State Emissions Testing ............. 329
INDEX
Inflating ........................... 273, 284 Steam Coming from Engine ....... 301
Specifications .......................... 320 Steering Wheel
Spark Plugs ................................ 318 Adjustments ............................. 77
Specifications ............................. 318 Anti-theft Column Lock ............ 80
Speed Control ............................ 194 Buttons ........................... 189, 194
Speed Limiter ...................... 218, 222 Storing Your Vehicle .................. 281
CONTINUED
IX
Index
Technical Descriptions Tires .......................................... 273 Required Federal

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Air Pressure ............................ 274 Explanation ......................... 324
Vehicles) ............................. 321 Chains ..................................... 278 Transmission
Emissions Control Systems ..... 326 Checking Wear ....................... 275 Checking Fluid Level,
Three Way Catalytic Compact Spare ........................ 284 Automatic ............................ 259
Converter ............................ 328 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Checking Fluid Level,
Tire Labeling ........................... 323 Vehicles) ............................. 321 Manual ................................ 260
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Inflation ................................... 273 Fluid Selection ................ 259, 260
(TPMS) Required Federal Inspection ............................... 275 Identification Number ............. 316
Explanation ...................... 324 Labeling .................................. 323 Shifting the Automatic ............. 219
Temperature Indicator ................. 63 Low Tire Pressure Shifting the Manual ................. 217
Temporarily Repairing a Flat Indicator ........................ 64, 235 Treadwear .................................. 321
Tire ........................................ 291 Maintenance ........................... 276 Trip Meter ................................... 69
Tensioners, Seat Belts .................. 20 Pressure Monitoring System ... 235 Turn Signals ................................. 63
Tether Anchorage Points ............. 47 Replacing ................................ 276
Theft Protection, Radio .............. 191 Rotating .................................. 276 U
Three Way Catalytic Snow ....................................... 278
Converter ............................... 328 Specifications .......................... 320 Unexpected, Taking Care of
Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel ... 77 Tools, Tire Changing ................. 285 the .......................................... 283
Time, Setting the ........................ 192 Towing Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Tire Chains ................................ 278 A Trailer .................................. 238 (U.S. only) .............................. 321
Tire, How to Change a Flat ........ 285 Emergency Wrecker ............... 311 Unleaded Gasoline ..................... 198
Tire Information ......................... 323 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring Upper Glove Box ........................ 105
Tire Labeling .............................. 323 System) .............................. 235 USB Flash Memory Device Error
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Indicator ............................ 64, 236 Messages ........................ 142, 183
(TPMS) ........................... 235, 324
X
Index
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ...... 255 Warranty Coverages (U.S. Wrecker, Emergency Towing .... 311
only) ....................................... 333
V Washer, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ........ 258
Vehicle Capacity Load ................ 209 Fluid Level Indicator (Canada
Vehicle Dimensions ................... 318 only) ..................................... 65
Vehicle Identification Number ... 316 Operation ................................. 73
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA), Wheels
aka Electronic Stability Adjusting the Steering .............. 77
Control (ESC), System Alignment and Balance ........... 276
VSA OFF Indicator .................. 233 Compact Spare ........................ 284
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) Wrench, Nut ........................... 285
System ................................ 233 Windows
VSA OFF Indicator ................... 67 Auto Reverse ........................... 101
VSA OFF Switch ..................... 234 Operating the Power ............... 100
VSA System Indicator .............. 67 Rear, Defogger ......................... 76
Vehicle Storage .......................... 281 Windshield
Ventilation .................................. 112 Cleaning ................................... 73
VIN ............................................ 316 Defroster ................................. 113
Viscosity, Oil .............................. 253 Washers ............................ 73, 258
INDEX
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ..................... 269
W Operation ................................. 73
Rear Windshield Wiper and
WARNING, Explanation of ........... iii Washer ................................. 73
Warning Labels, Location of ......... 54 Worn Tires ................................. 275
XI
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: Manual Transmission Fluid: Brake Fluid:

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane Honda Manual Transmission Fluid Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
number of 87 or higher. preferred, or an SAE 10W-30 or DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
Fuel Tank Capacity: 10W-40 motor oil as a temporary DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page 260). replacement (see page 261).
10.6 US gal (40 L)
Recommended Engine Oil: Capacity (including differential): Tire Pressure (measured cold):
API Premium grade 5W-20 1.6 US qt (1.5 L) Front/Rear:
detergent oil (see page 253). All models except Sport
Oil change capacity (including 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
filter): Sport model
3.8 US qt (3.6 L) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
Automatic Transmission Fluid: Spare Tire Pressure:
Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
(automatic transmission fluid)
(see page 259).

K61010om PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

K61010om PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2010 Fit

2009 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. P/N 00X31-TK6-6100

OWNER _________________________________________________________ This owner's manual should be considered a

ADDRESS _______________________________________________________ This owner's manual covers all models of the

California Proposition 65 Warning

Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) .................................................................................................................... 3

Driving (engine and transmission operation) ........................................................................................................... 213

Contents Before Driving Warranty and Customer Relations

DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG INSTRUMENT PANEL AUDIO SYSTEM

Your Vehicle at a Glance

PARKING BRAKE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (P. 219)

PADDLE SHIFTER HORN1 INSTRUMENT PANEL PADDLE SHIFTER WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your vehicle is equipped with many

Driver and Passenger Safety

Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

If you sit too close to the steering 3. Adjust the Seat-Backs

4. Adjust the Head Restraints When a passenger is seated in the

Driver and Passenger Safety

Adjust the seat-back to an

5. Fasten and Position the Seat

Never place the shoulder portion of a 6. Maintain a Proper Sitting

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

Lap/Shoulder Belt All seat belts have an emergency

Driver and Passenger Safety

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

Driver and Passenger Safety

Airbag System Components

Your airbag system includes:

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR If an adult or teenage passenger is Airbag Service

Driver and Passenger Safety

All Children Must Be Restrained

Driver and Passenger Safety

To remind you of the passenger's U.S. Models

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

Installing a Child Seat with BUTTON

Driver and Passenger Safety

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Driver and Passenger Safety

To deactivate the lockable retractor

Installing a Child Seat with a Using an Outer Anchor ANCHOR

Driver and Passenger Safety

Using the Center Anchor

When a child reaches the Checking Seat Belt Fit

Driver and Passenger Safety

To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

USB ADAPTER CABLE

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Instruments and Controls